JP2020199413A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine having an excellent operational feeling.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a posture correcting device 13312, which applies a load for changing posture of a swing operation member 13310 in a direction for reducing the amount of change of the posture when posture of the swing operation member 13310, which is viewed from a player operating the swing operation member 13310, is changed by movement of a lever member 13340, thus maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to be posture in that a player can easily operate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operating the machine (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating member.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having good operability of operating members.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an operating member that has an operating unit operated by the player and is configured to be movable, and the operating member and the gaming machine main body are connected and movable. The first state and the second state in which the posture of the operation member as seen by the player operating the operation unit is different from the first state due to the movement of the connection member. When it is possible to form the operating member, a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in the posture is provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 includes the driving device for driving the connecting member in the gaming machine according to claim 1, and the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture within the moving range of the connecting member and the operation. A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the member is not changed and the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member during the change state brakes the connection member. Turn to the direction to make.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 includes the contacted member that is brought into contact with the modifying means in the gaming machine according to claim 2, and the modifying means hits the contacted member when the operating member is moved. The posture of the operating member changes upon contact.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the operability of the operating member can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the operability during the driving operation can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the weight of the operating member can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (A) is a front view of the unlocked cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocked cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swinging member illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the third embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (A) to (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member showing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member. (A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the front cover, the back cover, the separation prevention cover and the protective cover in. (A) is a perspective view of the back side frame member, and (b) is the back side frame member in the direction view (direction view from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall) indicated by the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). It is a side view of the hook member in the LXXXVc direction view, and FIG. 85 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member in the line LXXXVd-LXXXXVd of FIG. 85 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is a top view of the support member of FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of the support member in -LXXXVIc line. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is the back side. It is a partial top view of a frame member and a posture correction device, (d) is a partial sectional view of a back side frame member and a posture correction device in line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and the posture correction apparatus in line 87 (d) LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). , (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e). Is. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the lock member according to the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb line of FIG. FIG. 3D is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction device. (A) to (d) are side views of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 17th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 19th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a rear view of the swing operation member in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104A. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 21st Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the 22nd embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibrating device 366.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodating recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the horizontal direction of the unit 15 is movable.

There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 to grip the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping the swinging operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swinging operation member 310 to grasp (whether or not it is moving). Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off from the back side frame member 311.

Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to move his / her neck. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right directions of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operation device 300.

The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown, and the inner case member 330 is shown in a disassembled state.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, wherein the relative phases of the eccentric cam member 333 are invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Is mainly provided.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d projecting to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the lever support shaft 331d.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332a and an upper side wall portion 332b extending to the left from the edges of the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched to the right. A bottomed tubular shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly provided with 332i.

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper part on the front side.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swinging shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the lock shaft 331d3 and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member in which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is locked. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by an end portion.

The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guides the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 into which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in teeth, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported by the gear damper receiving member 342 and whose axial outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the tubular portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swinging member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detection member 343 is axially located at a position (back side in FIG. 11) that is farthest from the tubular portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed from a magnetic material.

The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

FIG. 12 is a frontal disassembled perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end of the main body 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f is mainly provided.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the tubular portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the shaft of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a, the outer fitting portion 344b which is connected to the guide portion 344a and is formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the outer It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed from the metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The swing member 360 is a member that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is swingable around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, the cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface is mainly provided.

The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at an end portion on the front side, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e which is bent on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a slid. It can be rocked.

The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Of those supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. Note that in FIG. 13, the back side frame member 311 is not shown. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 which is arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 which is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

The intermediate frame member 312 has a ring-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer circumference of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected in the above, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a in the front-rear direction.

The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, the tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and returns.

The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d and includes a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at the lower end, with a plurality of light guide members 313a (8 in this embodiment) erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction. And when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swinging posture of the swinging operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is projected in a cylindrical shape from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the sensor, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e formed in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the main body 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large diameter portion 314d1 formed on the front side having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). It is possible to pass through the gap between the guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the first sensor member 313c, and the lower part of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13). ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is projected on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotary gear, a tubular tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, and a tubular portion 333b thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along the tip of the tubular portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d to be cut out, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e connecting the tubular portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. Mainly includes a portion 333f.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged to face each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position farthest from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. The strength of the weakened part can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a tubular shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric camshaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). The shaft support portion 334a and the shaft support portion thereof. A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is increased toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. 334c, which is a plate-shaped detection piece, and 334d, which has a shape corresponding to the notch 333d, are mainly provided.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase relative to the phase detection member 334 is invariant is detected by meshing the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d. can do.

16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the U-shaped open side. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibrating device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side while the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the part where the lock member 336 stops the swing of the peeling member 350 with the peeling member 350 in between. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in a design manner.

In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the release member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. Is abutted on the side of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have a combination.

By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in line XX-XX of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is urged by the coil spring in the direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that the pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (downward in FIG. 21A).

From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317, which is externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314, moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to push).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction approaching). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method of configuring the non-pushable state, the lens member 317 is locked with a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before pushing (see FIG. 18A).

That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibrating coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B, the state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is illustrated, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22B, the state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22A is shown.

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 22A) about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state shown in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 comes into contact with the end of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a stepped portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. it can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibration device 366 in the vibration direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 with the lever support shaft 331d1 as the center. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can be made smaller than the state shown in FIG. 22 (a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swinging operation member 310.

Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 23, a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load (load equal to or greater than the attractive force), and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side in the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, when the sensor detection piece 343b moves from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is pressed. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is again attracted to the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is the shaking of the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not take the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closing side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 24 (a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22 (a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)), and FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung toward the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24A). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp the swing operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retracted phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by rotating clockwise.

FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant velocity, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsional spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 are obtained by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase. The period in which the eccentric cam member 333 opposes (the period in which the angle is φ1) can be shortened as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (the period in which the angle is φ2).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in FIG. 25 (a) is shown in FIG. 25 (b). The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other becomes smaller. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The sight is omitted.

Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is desired while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) without swinging. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. It can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. It can be easy.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operation feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, whereby the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

Next, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and the swinging operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of the torsion spring SP21 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 at which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, although the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members in a manner in which a pair of members are brought close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the circumference. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of production. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed and held, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts his / her hand weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is sufficient.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparatory stage for operation) without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device 2366 and the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 are aligned to increase the vibration transmitted to the player side. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28 (a)) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the cam member 2333b has a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends axially along the shaft and is formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and has a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e, and the corresponding portions correspond to each other. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22 of the annular recess 2333a3, and the width in the radial direction is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the recessed depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to prevent deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

FIG. 31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is FIG. 31 ( It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in the direction of attracting each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, so that the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the attractive force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a deviated state.

32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward in the radial direction along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlock cam member of the main body 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33B).

The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is regarded as an aspect.

The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the unlock cam member 2339 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the unlock cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

Further, FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 comes into contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the tubular portion 2333b1 (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. In FIG. 35 (c), FIG. 35 The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the release portion 2339c of the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the lock portion of the lock member 2336, the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

After the unlock cam member 2339 has rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The swing is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is regulated by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)).

Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is settled or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swing is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The drive start timing can be easily matched.

Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. 36 (b) shows the state at the end on the forward rotation side. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by being formed, the elongated hole 2361f formed from the shaft hole 361c along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e, and the extension of the fixing plate portion 361e from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

As a result, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidably movable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared.

The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. It mainly includes a plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is arranged so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be arranged.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slidably moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 38A, a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28A and arranged in a downward position is shown. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. it can.

Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in the rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340 and made of metal. ..

The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and an electric current is conducted through the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the north pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the south pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when an electric current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 toward the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move up and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 peels off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if this can be prevented, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the swing operation member 310 is overloaded and repeatedly overloads the swing operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by receiving the electromagnetic force of the rod-shaped member 3345f.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the release member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for swinging the main body member 341, and the release member 350 swings. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission unit 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing an electric current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) toward the back side of the paper surface until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31. The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmission unit 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform operations. At this time, the path through which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is passed, the speed of the fanning operation can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. ..

FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction) depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f. Can be controlled. Therefore, the back button 312d is input on the control side by covering the swinging operation member 310 with the hand and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f without asking the player for an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged behind and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 swings in the rising direction.

Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 regulates the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and orientation of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are convex to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of the cam.

The lock member 4336 is arranged from below with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape and a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross-section and the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Is mainly provided.

The main body member 4336a is bored in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in the shape of a long plate and the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. A recessed portion 4336a4, which is recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2, is mainly provided.

The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion in which the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion of the transmission member 4336b that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (holding the posture in a state where the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed on the curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In addition, in FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

The lock member 4336 can be configured into a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 and holds the posture of the main body member 4336a.

If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contacting side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. It is mainly composed of.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. A pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1 are mainly provided.

The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. 4352 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 comes into contact with the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Can be done.

The rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3 to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. it can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

The operation speed can be diversified by variously changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340 and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state in which the pushing operation is performed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49A, the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 50A, FIG. 50B, FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B, a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

FIG. 50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) in the direction of tilting forward, when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it with certainty.

In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 projects to the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. It is driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. , FIG. 56A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially arranged.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid body portion 5333c1 having high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. Since it is not possible to swing the eccentric cam member 5333, there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (below FIG. 56B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a, and a shaft hole 5339b through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and a side surface of the main body 5339a on the front side toward the outside in the radial direction. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the unlock cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

The lock member 5336 is bored in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Mainly, the shaft support hole 5336b to be formed and the locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm is locked to the connecting side wall 331c. The other arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly provided is a convex portion 5336a2 which is projected along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b on the side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (for example, in the case of the first embodiment) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. This is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the lock member 4336 is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 The swing can be regulated.

As a result, resistance is suppressed from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 half a turn before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward by being operated by the player, and whenever the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. , The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed toward the unlocked state side. (Fig. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 enters the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung.

The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position (posture in FIG. 59B). To maintain.

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is formed at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

As shown in FIG. 61B, the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62)). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is pushed in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise), and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

As a result, after the lock member 5336 is released from the lock state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 63A, the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, and the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the regulation of the lock member 5336.

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. The state of contacting the side surface is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 Even if it swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). The period of being placed at the lower end) can be shortened. As a result, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. In addition, in FIG. 65A, a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336 is shown. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) arranged at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down (fanning operation).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

In the state shown in FIG. 65A, consider a case where a load is applied by the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the unlock cam is rotated clockwise with the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocked portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 interfere with each other even if they rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. The case where resistance is given to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the release member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is separated from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever The member 7340 is not subject to the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66 (b), the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 67A, the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner side surface is smooth. It is mainly provided with a second slide hole 8331i2 which is composed of the above and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f which is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a manner of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67A) in a state of being arranged to face each other. , Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face a surface contact with a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. The radius. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, a slight gap is provided between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be easily arranged on the fixed side at a desired position.

The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 swings while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 either attracts the magnet portion 8372 to the peeling member 350 or separates the peeling member 350 from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the lock member 8336 stops the swing of the lever member 340 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the release member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a load in the vertical direction is slightly applied.

From the state shown in FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swinging operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69A, the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the release member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and is released. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69A).

In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the contact.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69B), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, there is a possibility that the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 protrudes toward the release member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 comes into contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the release member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the release member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). A state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. The elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swinging operation member 310. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70B, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swinging operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swinging operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inner member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described, but the tenth embodiment has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, it is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ) Is shown in a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101, and in FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of the elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged so as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged due to the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. It is set to a position deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (a position deviated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operating member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (fanning operation). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swinging operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, a reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, giving the player a feeling of operation. Can be granted.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocally swung up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related to each other has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance when swinging is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 75 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g which is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

As a result, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operating device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the swinging member 360 at the angle regulating hole 361d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

The opening of the center of the bottom portion 312a of the intermediate frame member 12312 is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulation rod 365.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulation hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 is transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can operate the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. In the first embodiment described above, the lever member 340 rotates due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 during the rotation operation. However, in the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 on the opposite side of the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 while the lever member 340 rotates. It is possible to configure a state of displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, the swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 arranged inside the outer case member 13320.

As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 is formed on the back surface side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner of hiding the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion.

The adjustment elongated holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the positional deviation in the left-right direction that occurs between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 13322a recessed in the right direction from the end face of the right front cover 13322 in contact with the left front cover 13322 and the fitting recess 13322a. In a state where the wall member 13322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the movement to the left is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 to prevent the wall. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 13322b is replaced, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b is damaged due to the load from the posture correction device 13312). It is an easy place). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lock shaft 4331d3 on which the lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and the lock shaft 4331d3 arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 are formed to have a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 and the lock release cam member 5339 is pivotally supported. The lock release shaft 13331d5 is mainly provided.

A bent sheet metal member B13 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331 at the tip of the unlocking shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlock cam member 5339 is maintained so as not to be pulled out from the unlock shaft 13331d5.

Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is located in the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not arranged (the portion on the right side of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating the lock release shaft 13331d5, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332, which are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 13340 is arranged inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , The first drive device 335, the lock member 5336, the gear damper 338, and the unlock cam member 5339 are mainly provided.

FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. In FIG. 80, a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310 is shown, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

The back side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is coaxial with the main body member 13341 formed from a metal material such as iron and formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, the gear damper receiving member 342, and the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detection member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle control rod member 346, and the swing member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341. Mainly prepare.

FIG. 81 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 13340.

The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 is regulated by a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in the left-right direction. The hole 341c, the pair of swing member support portions 341d, the shaft hole 341e, the regulation hole 341f, and the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. Mainly includes a contact member 13341 g to be contacted.

The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface and is in contact with the lock member 5336 at the back surface side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 is a disk plate-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a back side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 which is arranged inside the back side frame member 13311 and has a portion protruding from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. The front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covers at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

The posture correction device 13312 has a support member 13312b disposed between the contact member 13312a protruding outward from the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311 and the contact member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. A hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that projects inward from the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and fits with the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

The contact member 13312a includes a straight rod-shaped overhanging portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 protruding from the overhanging portion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

The overhanging portion 13312a1 is a portion that overhangs the outside of the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the contact member 13312 is further extended. It is a part that prevents overhanging.

The front cover 13313 is provided with a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the back cover 13314 (in the back of FIG. 82).

The separation prevention cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 so that the protective cover 13316 can be received in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). A rod to be drilled and inserted into the inside is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured to be internally fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 83 shows the assembly method of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83A is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface of the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315 and the protective cover 13316.

As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83 (a), a state in which the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are fixed is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. 83 (a). Is added, and FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the back side frame member 13311.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the wall portions arranged to face each other with the fastening screw N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is fixed so as not to be removable.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a in a manner of covering the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right of FIG. 83C) in a non-pullable manner), and then. By fastening and fixing the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) to the back side frame member 13311, the upper side surface of the back side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, and the operation device 13300 can be partially disassembled to prevent fraudulent passage of wires inside.

That is, the fastening screw N13a must be removed in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 133315.

Further, where the fastening screw N13b must be removed in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the route to the fastening screw N13b is blocked by the protective cover 13316, and the protective cover 13316 thereof. Is abutted against the back side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, but in the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are on the back side of the back side frame member 13311. Since the 13322s are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

Next, the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a directional view of the arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a) (direction view from a direction perpendicular to the plane of the guide bottom wall 13311d). It is a top view of the back side frame member 13311 in FIG. 84 (c), and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXXIVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b).

As shown in FIG. 84, the back side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 84C) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extension wall 13311c extending laterally from the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the line, and a hook insertion hole 13311e formed in the vertical direction at the opposite end of the guide hole 13311b of the guide bottom wall 13311d. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined so that the side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d side moves away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. Due to this inclination, the contact area of the hook member 13312c described later with the inclined contact portion 13312c3 can be secured, and the guide bottom wall 13311d can be prevented from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

The support member guide wall 13311f is formed so that the upper end surface (front side surface in FIG. 84A) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c in view, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (d) is a side view of FIG. 85 (b). It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the line LXXXXVd-LXXXVd.

As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member having a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end portion of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 13312c1 and the main body portion 13312c1 along the vertical direction to the front side. Formed as a hook portion 13312c2 to be provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall protruding outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 13312c4 to be formed, and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in a manner in which a part of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is set to an inclination angle equivalent to the inclination angle of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the back side frame member 13311.

Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The support member 13312b is a member made of a hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction in a top view. FIG. 86A is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. (B) is a top view of the support member 13312b in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b in the line LXXXVIc-LXXXXVIc of FIG. 86 (b). is there.

As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1. Mainly includes a locking convex portion 13312b3 that is projected from the end of the main body portion 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peep hole 13312b4 that is bored in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

When the main body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peephole 13312b4. Therefore, the coil spring SP13 may be forgotten to be inserted during assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b may shift. Can be prevented.

Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. In addition, in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 is shown in time series.

87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIId-LXXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c). It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a partial top view of FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e).

The method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correction device 13312 is moved to the back side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) along the guide bottom wall 13311d, and FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is retrofitted, the space of the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (the support member 13312b in FIG. 87 (d)). The space on the left side) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), in the contact member 13312a, the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (dammed) to the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, and the back side frame member 13311 It is arranged inside the.

In the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being contracted more than its natural length. That is, a load directed to the right is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the hook member 13312c is placed on the back side of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311. It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (below FIG. 88 (b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, the appearance when the hook member is forgotten to be assembled or the hook member is damaged and falls off. You can notice those defects by inspection.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts on the lower side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and in that state, the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved to the left in FIG. 88 (f) to the position where the support member 13312b abuts on the hook member 13312c due to the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the movement of the support member 13312b to the left is due to the hook member 13312c. (Prevented), the locking convex portion 13312b3 is covered from above by the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c, so that the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted.

That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13.

In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 to the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is on the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. When the hook-shaped portion that prevents the frame member 13311 from moving upward is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-shaped portion. Will also need to be moved.

In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, which may interfere with the function of the posture correction device 13312. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it becomes necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, it is necessary to move it twice the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases (for example, doubles) by that amount, and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when assembling the hook member 13312c. Depends on displacement. Therefore, if the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, it can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

When removing the posture correction device 13312, the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged by moving the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 88F) of the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) from the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311 It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311 and fraudulently pulling out the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c.

In order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are brought into close contact with each other in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)). I need to let you. Therefore, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship, but due to variations in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 may go to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 just by fitting normally. There is a possibility that there is no such case (the back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88F) and the locking convex portion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member stops in the middle).

In the present embodiment, the hook member 13312c is deformed by a relatively small force by concentrating and pushing the force into the recessed portion 13312c5 arranged on the hook member 13312c, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is locked by the convex portion. It can be pushed inward of the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

Further, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b moves until it is pressed against the wall portion on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted through the hook insertion hole 13311e.

Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 89A shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 89B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 89A, the vibrating device 366 is displaced in the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operating member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (in a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363). The case where the player sets the operation direction U13a for pushing the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction) will be described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed in without returning).

By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Here, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The lever member 13340 is rotated by the angle θ13x formed by the straight line X13a parallel to the above and the straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes the angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the overhanging portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation is performed on the lever member 13340. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise by an angle θ13y in FIG. 89 (a). The angle θ13y is set to an angle similar to the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

When the swing operation member 13310 swings and rotates with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is an angle θ13y). Therefore, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Since this can be done, it is possible to avoid a change in the operation feeling and a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317.

In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

Further, since the swing operation member 13310 is configured to change its posture at the timing when it is arranged in the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to easily indicate to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying "press" or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol The display of the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to the lever member 13340, and the force applied from the posture correction device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is the lever member. It occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89 (b), a load for rotating the swing operation member 13310 clockwise (b) occurs). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correction device 13312 for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much and the rear end portion (right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 intends to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotate from the state shown in FIG. 89B). It is placed in a suitable position. As a result, even when the player applies an overload to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation shaft of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and rotate the swing operation member 13310 by the mesh rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 changes the posture of the swing operation member 13310 by contacting the wall member 13322b, so that the swing operation member 13310 is arranged on the lever member 13340. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the elastic force (displacement in the torsional direction) of the torsion spring SP2 that urges the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state in which the torsion spring SP2 is arranged in the upward position. , The state where it is placed in the downward position is larger. Further, in the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correction device 13312 toward the swing operation member 13310 in a manner in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the direction opposite to the urging direction of the torsion spring SP2.

Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is such that the swing operation member 13310 is in the downward position as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The state of being placed in is larger. Therefore, there are two states: a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has a small (light) operation feeling with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position) and a state in which the rotation resistance is large (heavy) in operation (downward position). Can be formed.

For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is affected by the hit reaction. While it is possible to produce an effect of wobbling with respect to the lever member 13340, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is performed. By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be solidified with respect to the lever member 13340, and for example, it is possible to suppress failure to hit the lens member 13317 when it is continuously hit. ..

The change in the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by a change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action is not changed by the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 90A and FIG. 90B, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. In FIG. 90B, a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted while the state of being rotated in the rearward direction is shown. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward is shown.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is configured to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded. The posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 is affected by the displacement. Since it increases proportionally, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 13310 from rotating excessively.

In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged on the directions Y13a and Y13b for pushing the lens member 13317, the swing operation member is subjected to the load of pushing the lens member 13317. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force for rotating the 13310.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 is always arranged in the downward position causes the swing operation member 13310 to change its posture. However, the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment swings. It is possible to switch between the case where the swinging operation member 14310 changes its posture and the case where the posture does not change when the operating member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

91 (a) is a front view of the lock member 14336 in the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a rod shape that is long in the vertical direction, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. It mainly includes a locking member 14336c which is configured to be movable in the sinking direction.

The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and an urging spring SP14a is arranged between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a, and is in contact with the unlocking cam member 5339 when traveling. It is placed in a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering on the upper side surface.

Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward of the main body member 14336a along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92A). (Immersion) is possible, and the lock member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c when the contact is made from the front side (for example, from the left side in FIG. 91B). ..

The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that abuts and rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

As shown in FIG. 92A, the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a tubular portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (FIG. 92 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface), and an umbrella portion. Mainly includes 5333f.

The cam portion 14333c is a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. 92 (a) and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 92 (b)). A convex portion 14333c2, which is projected from an end portion of the 14333c1, is provided.

The convex portion 14333c2 is configured such that the side surface in the circumferential direction is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the convex portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force for pushing the convex portion 14337b1 is not only the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft). It can also be generated by the load generated in the distance relationship with 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension portion 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to the shaft support portion 14337c that pivotally supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at the connecting portion with the extension portion 14337b and the end portion of the main body member 14337a. The elastic device 14337d and the like are mainly provided.

The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end on the opposite side of the end pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can project from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92A, the main body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (positional relationship in which the main body member 14337a is touched at a distance of 0) even if it comes into contact with the swing operation member 14310, but cannot apply a load.

The extension portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 92A) so that it can come into contact with the convex portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. 92 (a) is provided with a convex portion 14337b1 projecting on the front side of the paper surface. Here, the convex portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)), it is arranged at a position deviating from the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2.

In the elastic device 14337d, the case is fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is recessed in a dogleg shape, and the recessed portion can be changed in position while being urged by a coil spring. It is composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, if the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form that converges on the dogleg-shaped recessed portion.

FIG. 92 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise to rotate the lock member 14336. , The state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the upward position is shown. That is, between FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the guide hole drilled for the posture correction device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to project. A back side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that the 13311b is closed is arranged on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

93 (a) and 93 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 92 (a).

That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92 (a), no load is generated from the attitude switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. 94 (b) shows FIG. 94 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 side from the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 94 (c) shows. , The state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 94B and the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 is released is shown.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in a state where the rotation angle of the extension portion 14337b is smaller than that in the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1. The contact with and can be released.

That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extending portion 14337b continues to rotate until the convex portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the convex portion 14337b1 can escape between the convex portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extension portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94 (b) (see FIG. 94 (c)). Therefore, the region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance to rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) are the lines corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa lines of FIG. 17 (a) with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. In FIG. 95A, the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in a downward position, and the convex portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the convex portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. FIG. A state equivalent to 92 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 95 (a), and the convex portion 14333c pushes the convex portion 14337b1. The state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown, and in FIG. 96 (a), the state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) is shown. Illustrated, FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship so as not to come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, while the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to avoid transmitting them at the same time, so that the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is suppressed. Can be done.

Since the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 (the side surface that comes into contact with the convex portion 14337b1) is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the convex portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. The force that pushes the convex portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load generated by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be made to. Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 96 (b), it returns to the state of FIG. 95 (a). At this time, since the unlock cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, the locking member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in an immersive state, and the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is performed. It is prevented from being hindered.

As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes when the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be loosened (slightly idle) as compared with the case where a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310. However, it is possible to prevent the appearance from changing).

Here, the time until the eccentric cam member 14333 changes from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). By matching the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be adjusted. By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state of FIG. 92 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 92 (b) at the same timing after the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is driven, or the state of FIG. 95 (a). Either change from state to state in FIG. 95 (b) can occur.

For example, it takes longer than the time until the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) occurs until the change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) after the operating vibration of the drive motor 335a is felt, it is inevitable that the state shown in FIG. ) Will change to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b), and it is possible to determine what kind of operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, does it cause a change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b)? It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310.

In the present embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 are meshed with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears. In this case as well, the time from operating one of the drive motors until the swinging operation member 14310 starts swinging with respect to the lever member 13340 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A) and the lever. The same effect can be obtained by combining the time until the member 13340 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 92 (a).

In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor, which takes a long time, is rotated first, and the second drive motor, which takes a short time, is rotated later, and then first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this period), the player feels the vibration of the first drive motor, which takes a long time, and the first The operation by the drive motor of 2 can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 start to come into contact with each other. FIG. 97 (b) shows FIG. 97 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 97 (c) shows FIG. 97. From the state of (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state in which the convex portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 97, the closer the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, the more it is inclined from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Therefore, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 The displacement due to the above causes the convex portion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the shaft of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component in the axial direction of the load becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction is generated in the eccentric cam member 14333.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), since the load applied from the convex portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a Even when the power is turned off, the load from the convex portion 14337b can be countered. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a. It is possible to configure a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame in a line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312, and FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c).

Note that FIG. 98A shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98B shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is pulled out from the overhanging member 13312a1 (in FIG. 98B). The unplugged state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a is formed with a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 having a deformable end portion and a T-shaped cross section, and the overhang member 15312a1. Mainly includes a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the.

The overhanging member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped main body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the main body portion 15312a11 in the lateral direction. Be prepared. The connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 and the deforming portion 15312a12 is provided with a cut so as to be easily deformed, and the deformed portion 15312a12 is the main body portion in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). It fits inside the width of 15312a11 in the lateral direction.

The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed so as to fit between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 of the overhanging member 15312a1 and the deformed portion 15312a12 from the base portion 15312a21. Also mainly includes a convex portion 15312a22 which is convexly provided with a short width.

With such a configuration, when the convex portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98B).

In FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311 is illustrated. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the overhanging member 15312a1 from the coil spring SP13. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and fraudulently pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the LXXXXXIXb- of FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in line LXXXXXXb.

In addition, in FIGS. 99A and 99B, a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c is shown. ..

In the states shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), since the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, the force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhanging member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state shown in FIG. 98 (b)), the contact member 15312a is brought into the removed state. As a result, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside (right side in FIG. 99B) of the back side frame member 13311.

That is, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced by simply sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it collides with other members and is easily damaged. A certain overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the force of pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the back side frame member 13311 is reduced by moving the support member 13312b due to the hook member 13312c falling off, so that the hook member When a large load such as the 13312c falling off due to cracking is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to prevent the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that the replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as the number of times the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thereby, the replacement time of the contact member 15312a can be determined by using the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in the state where the hook member 13312c has fallen off, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that the replacement can be easily performed and the maintenance performance can be improved.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position, and the neck is changed. The case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, but in addition to this, the operation device 16300 in the 16th embodiment operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

100 (a) to 100 (d) are side views of the operation device 16300 according to the 16th embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 100A to 100D, an external view of the swing operation member 16310 is shown, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other parts are schematically imagined. Illustrated by a line.

100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in an upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 faces downward. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated, in FIGS. 100 (b) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward rotation side (clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the fastening portion of the back side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 sandwiched between a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e that changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 and a back side frame member 13311 arranged below the separation prevention cover 16315 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided.

The separation prevention cover 16315 is provided on the wall surface of the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82), and the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. An extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 of the extension portion 16315c, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. 16315e, which is movably arranged, and is mainly provided.

The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e arranged inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100A, the right end portion is from the shaft support rod 363 as compared with the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation side end portion to the backward rotation side end portion is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100 (a) to less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operating member 16310 is arranged in the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 (maintaining the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d) regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is arranged in the downward position. Can be done). In this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron and is a ball capable of carrying most of the weight of the swinging operation member 16310. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 changes as the iron ball 16315e moves.

As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is the shaft support rod 363. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), in the state where the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity. The position is moved away from the shaft support rod 363.

That is, the distance from the shaft support rod 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310. (Fig. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d)), the swing operation member 16310 is moved forward by the player pushing the lens member 13317. After rotating in the rolling direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c). ) To the state of FIG. 100 (d)) can be lengthened as compared with the case where the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis (so that it returns slowly). Can be).

As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is changed to the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. .. In this case, it takes a long time for the player to hit the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 returns to the state shown in FIG. 100 (d) after the swing operation member 16310 is in the state shown in FIG. 100 (c). Even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when hitting repeatedly), the posture of the swinging operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). Compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG. 100 (d), the continuous striking operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

Further, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100 (a). Since the direction of rotation is the direction of moving the iron ball 16315e downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a).

On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (c) is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. FIG. 100 (c) The rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise.

Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotational resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced. Can be reversed.

According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to the change in the internal condition of the swing operation member 16310), so that the direction is opposite to the movement direction of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the twisting degree of the torsion spring SP2 has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has the swing member 17360. By rubbing against the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and the swinging operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown.

In the present embodiment, the swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed in a manner of rubbing against a wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

Further, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extension portion 17322b1 extending upward from the upper end portion thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in contact with the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the is arranged in the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 has a shaft support rod having a contact surface pressed against the tip end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. It is formed in an arc shape centered on 363. As a result, the contact area between the extending portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 increases due to the dynamic friction force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Since the change in the operation feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is slowly operated, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 Since the dynamic friction force can be applied in the same manner to the rotation of the head, it is possible to surely cause a change in the operation feeling.

Further, since the dynamic friction force is changed by the pressing force and not by the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, when the rotation starts), a sufficient dynamic friction force can be generated.

In the present embodiment, since the extension portion 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, if the extension portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, the wall member 17322b can be easily replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operating member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described, but the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swing member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

102 (a) to 102 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81). The state in which (see) is removed is shown. Further, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

The operation device 18300 in the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 which is arranged inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 which pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The swing member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulation rod 365 and a vibrating device 366 are mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102 (a)), and in the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends thereof are immovably pinned around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

The lever member 18340 includes a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The main body member 18341 sandwiches an elongated hole 18341h extending in an inclined direction from the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and an extending direction of the elongated hole 18341h in a side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. It mainly includes a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the elongated hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB.

The transmission device 18347 is pivotally supported by a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion to be inserted into the elongated hole 18341h and having a size that allows sliding movement between the guide wall portions 18341i, and a lower end portion of the push-in portion 18347a. The adjusting portion 18347b and the overhanging portion 18347c protruding from the lower end portion of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in the present embodiment) are mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102 (a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the overhanging portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide are in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide with each other while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. The wall portion 18341i is arranged.

By extending the overhanging portion 18347c beyond the axial support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction close to the overhanging portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easy to rotate and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is difficult to rotate with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

From such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a, and the pushing force is used. Part 18347a does not move along the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state of FIG. 102 (a), the adjusting portion 18347b is locked to the overhanging portion 18347c in the rotational direction, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed into the pushing portion 18347a. A driving force is used to move the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely attached, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. .. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 looks the same as the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to switch whether the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. As a result, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described, but the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment receives the load generated from the posture correction device 13312. It is possible to apply it to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

103 (a) and 103 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the 19th embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which no force is applied is shown, and in FIG. 103 (b), a state in which a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)) is shown. Illustrated.

The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that the locking convex portion 19345e is convexly provided from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and is added from the lever member 13340. The locking convex portion 19345e is arranged at a position where the swing operating member 13310 is placed on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the present embodiment, the inner case member 19330 is arranged instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added to the inside of the inner case member 13330.

The transmission device 19337 is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and formed in an L-shaped cross section, and the rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force (counterclockwise) is mainly provided.

When the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that comes into contact with the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331 and its posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rotary lever 19337b is bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 and the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction, the surface and surface position where the tip portion abuts on the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321. A contact portion 19337b2 arranged in the above is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the inner case member 19330 also has an opening, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. It is configured so that it can be contacted with.

With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. It will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 moves due to the rotation of the swing operation member 13310), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is obtained). In this state, the rotary lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and the load is not transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotary lever 19337b can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. , The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking convex portion 19345e in the rotational direction, the lever member 19340 rebounds in the rotational direction via the rotary lever 19337b (FIG. 103 (b), an operation of rotating clockwise). ) Can be suppressed.

Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction of raising the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end portion of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B), but in the present embodiment, the rotary lever 19337b is configured to be able to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340, so that the lock member 5336 is applied. The load to be applied can be reduced.

Further, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 may increase and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. However, in the present embodiment, the lens member 13317 Since the rotary lever 19337b can come into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied to (see FIG. 77), it is usual (for example, when the player is not touching the swing operation member 13310). The rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, when an overload is applied, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased to make the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)). The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correction device 13312 for rotating the swing operation member 13310 in the rising direction operates in a linear motion has been described, but in the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, the posture correction device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a dynamic device. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

104 (a) and 104 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 20300 in the 20th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 104 (a). It is a rear view of the swinging operation member 20310 in the arrow CV direction view of a).

In addition, in FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction without a force being applied is shown. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 (b)). b) The state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise) is shown.

The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on the back side frame member 20311 having a cup shape (outer shape similar to the back side frame member 13311) and the back side frame member 20311 arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366. The posture correction device 20312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, the protective cover 13316, and the lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

The back side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides the opening on the back surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correction device 20312, and the recessed portion 20311c1 formed so as to support the shaft rod portion 20312a1. From the insertion recess 20311c2 recessed above the recessed portion 20311c1 in a cross-sectional fan shape (the shape becomes wider as it gets deeper from the entrance) and the recessed portion 20311c1 of the insertion recess 20311c2. It mainly includes a locking convex portion 20311c3 that is projected from the inner side surface on the distant side.

The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a in a manner of penetrating the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

The main body member 20312a includes a shaft rod portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape by arranging the shaft rod portion 20312a1 at an end portion, and a shaft rod portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between the 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinching portion in which the leaf spring member 20312b is recessed so as to be sandwiched at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4. It mainly includes a recess 20312a5.

The side surface of the recessed portion 20311c2 on the side far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall portion on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical distance between them is larger than the thickness of the leaf spring portion agent 20312b. Is also slightly enlarged.

The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3, and is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2 in the assembled state and is recessed. The upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft rod portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 are bent and the opening 20312a3 is directed inward. The lower portion 20312b2 is extended and inserted into the sandwiching recess 20312a5, and the locking hole 20312b3 is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A is rotationally rubbed counterclockwise).

The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking convex portion 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is loaded outward (to the right in FIG. 104 (a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2. ..

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction in which it falls off, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together, but the moving direction locks the locking hole 20312b3 of the leaf spring member 20312b. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a can be prevented from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the back side frame member 20311, the plate is in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the shaft rod portion 20312a1 from the recessed portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correction device 2031 during the game, even though the structure does not use any fastening members such as screws.

Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end portion of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end portion of the operating region hole 20311b. The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed on the outside of the back side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by the visual inspection.

As a method of assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring portion agent 20312b is not yet inserted into the narrow holding recess 20312a5.

Next, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b in a state where it can freely move inside the opening 20312a3 is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104 (a) can be formed by pulling the lower portion 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the narrow holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated in the direction close to the locking convex portion 20311c3 with the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum as a fulcrum, and the locking hole 20311c3. The 20312b3 is hooked on the locking convex portion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2.

In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it can be easily assembled and removed (the lower side frame member 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is as in the assembled state. If the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of the 20311, it becomes difficult to remove it.

Therefore, when the back side frame member 20311 is removed and the posture correction device 20312 is removed from the inside as in the case of maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture is corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Cheating such as removing device 20312 can be made difficult.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described, but in the operation device 21300 in the 21st embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. Consists of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

106 (a) and 106 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 21300 in the 21st embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 106 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. To.

As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (in the diagonally upper left direction in FIG. 106 (a)) and arranged inside a pair of friction arm portions 17362c.

The extended slide portion 21322b2 includes an elongated hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the vertical direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106A, and is outside the arc passing through the position centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 from that position. Is extended downward so that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases, and the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, a vibrating device 366, and the like. (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a convex pin 21362d projecting inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

In the present embodiment, since the convex pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the movement mode of the swinging operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 due to the rotation of the lever member 13340 is changed by setting the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21. be able to. For example, by making the elongated hole 21322b21 a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 with respect to the lever member 13340 of the swing operation member 13310 when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the lever member 13340 is rotated to be convex. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated to fill the gap in the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the elongated hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in conjunction with) with the rotation operation of the lever member 13340 (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state of FIG. 106 (a) to the state of FIG. 106 (b)). , FIG. 106 (a) is rotated clockwise), so that the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. As a result, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. In the 21st embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture by guiding the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove portion 21322b21 has been described. However, the operation device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment has been described. The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the tooth rotation of the gear. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

107 (a) and 107 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. In addition, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 107 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 22340 is shown. To. Further, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 that is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting the swing operation member 13310 at one end (left side of FIG. 107 (b)). A wall member 22322b having an arc wall portion 22322b2 that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swing member 22360 having a tooth plywood portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Mainly prepare.

The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 axially supported by the angle control rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and is an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inward extending portion 22322b1 thereof. 22322b2 is an arc wall portion that extends from the inner end of 22322b1 (right side in FIG. 107 (a)) along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and has gear teeth that are meshed with the rotary gear 22347. And.

The swing member 22360 is a motor fixing plate having a tooth plywood portion 22362c in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with gear teeth meshed with the rotary gear 22347. It is configured in a manner exchanged for 22362.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotation of the lever member 22340 causes the rotary gear 22347 to rotate with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is pivotally supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. It is rotated around the rod 363. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees during that time. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plywood portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and projects in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. The front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in a packing box when it protrudes from the outside.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By making the swing operation member 310 reciprocate up and down, it is possible to perform a fanning operation.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to regulate the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to relieve the load on the 310.

On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the release member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the release member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information from the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape memory material that maintains the shape of the hook member 13312c at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed of a hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by deforming the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the back side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a friction coefficient smaller than that of the first region may be formed on the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c first gives a feeling of operation (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing against each other. It can be changed depending on whether it rubs against the region or when the friction arm portion 17362c rubs against the second region.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be achieved by moving the rotary lever 19337b in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing them into contact with each other.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a regulating member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement by the regulating member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the operating member.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operates is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example,). (See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member while the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member so that the movement can be regulated by the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. As a result, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member must be applied with a load greater than the attractive force. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when the moving member is operated as usual with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the moving member can be easily operated.

In the game machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, by being loaded with the load of the above, at least the operating member can be configured in a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member. Therefore, the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

In the game machines A1 and 2, the support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulated member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulated member or the subject It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

The game machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is a case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member while the moving member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the direction of urging the operation member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, so that the operation member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the operating member is directed in the direction of raising and a non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

In the game machine A6, the game machine A7 includes a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the game machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

A9 of the game machine A8, wherein the gear damper is arranged in a manner of generating a viscous resistance with respect to the relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operation member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operation member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be made to act on the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operating member and encourage the player to use the operating member appropriately.

For example, when the operating resistance when operating the operating member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operating member, which causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and said. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the state changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , Damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member receives the load. In this case, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the game machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the regulating member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is formed by the operation.

Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is regulated at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing the game machine, the operating member is regulated at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position where the moving member projects the operating member, the operating member and the regulated member are still in contact with each other. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, it is possible to release the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the game machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated from the driving device are used as the moving member. A game machine including a transmission member for transmitting to the above, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is moved by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmitting member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmitting member. It can be suppressed. In addition, the drive can prevent the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member that is rotated about the first axis.

Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The game machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction that brings the moving member and the transmission member close to each other. Game machine B3.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. Therefore, the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier for the player to draw the attention of the moving member.

In the game machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and below the moving member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft in between, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmitting member when the player pushes down the operating member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

In the game machine B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the operation member is provided with an effect member for producing an effect on the player.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, since the operation member is provided with the effect member for producing the effect on the player, the operation member can attract the attention of the player.

Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the substrate, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A game machine B6 characterized by this.

Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A game machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operation member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed are configured.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the person.

For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the pushing-in impossible state is set, the entire operating member is pushed down in response to the pushing operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in the direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a push-in impossible state. Can be made to.

In any of the game machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. A game machine B10 characterized in that the direction is opposed to a moving member.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is a direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis with the second axis in between. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and is pivotally supported and eccentrically supported by the rotating gear to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the movement. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized in that it is possible.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<Example of technical concept in which the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support on the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the moving member to swing. A regulateable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulating member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A game machine C1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmitting member driven by a driving device. In response to the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swing of the moving member is regulated during the swing of the moving member, and the swing of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in the phase in which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation is performed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulation member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

In the game machine C2, when the regulating member is put into the standby state, the swing of the moving member is restricted by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member. The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step of restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to regulate the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. As a result, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a tangential force, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmitting member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is formed by the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when it starts to come into contact with the moving member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member by a tangential force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

In the game machine C4, the game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect is improved. be able to.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A game machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the transmission member includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration of the vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is generated by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibrating device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibrating device.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member to generate vibration of the vibrating device. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member that absorbs vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second shaft is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device vibrates and swings around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when pushing the pushing member, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the game machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating axis of the vibrating device and the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device are shifted to rotate the vibrating device. The vibration of the device can be utilized, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

The game machine D6 includes a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by the player.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is provided on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member during the operation, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to perform an input operation, and the input device is driven in a direction in which the player is moved away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing for operating the input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player, and the player's fingers By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing back the input unit, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the game machine side.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

In the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than that of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. A game machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player holding the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that the game machine E4 is provided with a locking portion for locking the fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input part side is received by the palm, and the vibration by the vibration device is generated by hooking the finger on the locking part. Can be confined inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

<An example of the technical idea that the spherical part turns to the player side at the lower end of the movement>
It is provided with an operation member having an operation unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable, and by moving the connecting member. When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction.

A gaming machine is known that includes an operating member having an operating portion such as a push button, and the posture of the operating member with respect to the player changes between the first state and the second state when the operating member moves (for example, special feature). Open 2014-144218 (see). In such a game machine, for example, if the posture is set so that the player can easily operate it in the first state, it may be difficult to operate in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operating member is felt in the first state and the second state. There is a problem that the player feels stress due to the change and the player may be dissatisfied.

For example, when the operating member is arranged at a distance from the front side of the player and the operating unit requires a pushing-down operation, even if the operating unit can be easily operated, the operating member is extended in the left-right direction. When the player approaches the player by moving in an arc orbit centered on the player and the operation unit changes to a mode in which a pushing operation from the front side is required, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrow, and the game It becomes difficult for a person to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon the operation of the operation unit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating member by moving the connecting member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. In this case, since the correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in the direction of reducing the amount of change is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to change the operating feeling of the operating member. Therefore, by being configured to be easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

The correction means is composed of, for example, a wall member and a contact member arranged on the operation member in a manner capable of contacting the wall member, and occurs when the contact member comes into contact with the wall member. A device that changes the posture of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that meshes with the gear teeth arranged on the operating member, and a group of gears that apply a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. Is exemplified.

Moreover, as a mode of movement of the connecting member, rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like are exemplified.

The game machine F1 is provided with a drive device for driving the connecting member, and the operating member is in a changing state in which the posture of the operating member changes within the moving range of the connecting member, and the operating member is not changed in posture and the operating member and the connecting member are not changed. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member in the change state is directed to brake the connection member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven as compared with the case where the connecting member constantly changes its posture. The driving force required for braking can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correction means in the changing state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device can brake the connecting member. The correction means can assist the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range to form a changing state, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. The moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member can be reduced by the load, and the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member is suppressed from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to the vicinity of the upper end of the moving range. , The driving force required to drive the connecting member can be suppressed.

The game machine F2 includes a contacted member that comes into contact with the correcting means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the contacted member when the operating member moves. The featured game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the operation member changes its posture due to the contact between the correction means and the contacted member, so that the driving force of the driving device can be transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is changed until the correction means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. By maintaining the above, it is possible to indicate the timing at which the player operates the operation unit.

In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the changed state, the operating member is subjected to the operation member by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correction means to the operating member. The gaming machine F4, wherein the correction means is configured so that the posture can be changed in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture changes in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force face each other in the direction facing the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction in which the load may become excessive, the correcting means is configured to be able to change the posture of the operating member in the predetermined direction, thereby suppressing the destruction of the correcting means. can do.

In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the game machine F5, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the posture change of the operation member is deformed. Is possible, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operating member, the moving amount of the operating member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operating member from the correction means as the moving amount of the operating member increases. Can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the abutting member provided with the abutting means, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the amusement machine main body, and the abutting means abuts the abutting member. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when it comes into contact with the member is a direction having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the correction means abuts on the contacted member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member, and thus is operated by the correction means. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the lever member from vibrating in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correction means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member when the operating member comes into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture can be stabilized, and the operability can be improved.

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the contacted member projects so as to be in contact with the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correction means.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the contacted member through the correction means by the operation of the player or the like, the contacted member is used as the lever member. The lever member can be braked by projecting to the abutting position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member, but when the load applied to the operating member from the correction means is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member Movement resistance can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of a technical idea that can switch whether or not the spherical part turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operating member having an operating unit operated by the player, a connecting member for connecting the operating member to the game machine main body in a manner movable by a predetermined width, and at least a driving device for driving the connecting member are provided and connected. In a gaming machine in which the operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture with the member arranged at a predetermined position, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The first operating state in which the transmission member is provided and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is maintained in the first posture, and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position. The driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member, and the operating member is configured to be switchable between a second operating state in which the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is invariant between the first operating state and the second operating state.

There is known a game machine that includes an operating member and a connecting member and drives the operating member relative to the connecting member by a driving device that drives the connecting member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are scenes where operability is emphasized and scenes where the effect is emphasized, since there is only one type of movement of the operating member with respect to the movement of the connecting member, is it important to emphasize operability? There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one that emphasizes the effect and sacrifice the other.

For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on an operation member, it is easier for the player to push the push button when the posture of the push button as seen from the player is constant, while the operation member is arranged. Since the movement of itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to perform a large effect by utilizing the movement of the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture when the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position, and in the state where the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture, the second operating state can be switched while keeping the movement width of the operating member unchanged. , It is possible to achieve both operability and directing effect.

For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pushed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of the production that does not require the player to operate, by keeping the posture of the operating member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to the disregarded production, and the operating member can be greatly operated. .. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in operability and improvement in color rendering.

Further, since the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state, the player is in which operating state the operating member is in until the posture of the operating member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the player is playing, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the first operating state is set until the player is made to operate the operation unit, the operating member is continuously reciprocated with a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operating state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operating member. , The player can be informed of the timing to press the operation unit, and the operation member itself is placed in an easy-to-push posture to make the game easy to understand (the timing to press the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). Can be made easier to press).

The game machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits a driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connecting member, and the eccentric cam member is the said. The gaming machine G2 is configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to either the transmitting member or the connecting member, and includes a switching means capable of switching which of the transmitting members is transmitted.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member It is possible to suppress the driving force generated from the driving device as compared with the case where the two are driven at the same time.

As a mode for switching whether to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member or the operating member, a gear group in which the driving device and the connecting member are connected by teeth from the driving device is arranged, depending on the situation. The eccentric cam member is configured so that the gears to be meshed can be switched, and the eccentric cam member can come into contact with either the connecting member or the transmitting member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. An embodiment in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member comes into contact with the transmission member in a state of being rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the driving force is not transmitted to the operating member when it comes into contact with the transmitting member in such a state.

Here, for example, when the eccentric cam member and the connecting member are separated from each other and the driving force is transmitted to the operating member, vibration during operation or the player operating the operating member. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. It is necessary to add, and the control of the drive device becomes complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, so that the connecting member and the eccentricity can be switched. Even if the cam member is separated in the middle of operation, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched as long as the eccentric cam member is continuously rotated in a certain direction, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. The control of the drive device can be relaxed (it is not necessary to stop the drive device immediately).

Further, since the detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first convex portion projecting along the rotation axis on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a manner capable of contacting the first convex portion. A second convex portion to be convex is provided, and the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second convex portion is configured to be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. Since the second convex portion can be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion, the position of the second convex portion can be returned to the first convex portion and the eccentric cam member. This can be done by passing the second convex portion between the rotating shafts of the above.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the second convex portion moves to the outside of the locus of the outer diameter portion of the first convex portion of the eccentric cam member and then the posture of the transmission member is restored, the first convex portion is the first. The rotation angle of the transmission member from the contact with the convex portion to the separation from the convex portion can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

In the game machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface that comes into contact with the second convex portion is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction. The featured game machine G5.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, which is a state in which the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, is forward rotation, the transmission member and the contact member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction, the eccentric cam member is formed as compared with the case where the pushing member is formed of the wall surface along the predetermined direction. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time, so that a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operation member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

In any of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connecting member at a predetermined position is provided, and the unlocking of the posture of the connecting member by the locking member causes the eccentric cam member to rotate in the reverse direction. On the other hand, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that when the eccentric cam member rotates in the forward direction, the posture of the connecting member is maintained by the locking member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction, so that the connecting member is placed in a predetermined position. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (forward rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connecting member. .. Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, the posture of the connecting member can be maintained by the lock member and the posture of the operating member can be changed, so that the control of the drive device can be relaxed. it can.

<Example of technical concept in which the restraining member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force pushing out the second moving member>
A first moving member configured to be movable, and a first movable member that is arranged in a state in which at least a part of the first moving member is projected outward and is movable with respect to the first moving member. Two moving members, an elastic member arranged on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member, and elastic member having spring elasticity. An inhibitory member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and is pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member to prevent the second moving member from separating from the first moving member. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the force of pressing the restraining member against the first moving member is increased by moving the portion of the second moving member that projects from the first moving member.

A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that projects outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged due to a collision with another member and need to be replaced. Therefore, it is better to temporarily fix the first moving member. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated at the time of collision with other members.

In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time to screw in the screws when assembling, and it takes time to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, which increases the work time.

That is, firmly fixing the second moving member to the first moving member, assembling the second moving member to the first moving member, and shortening the work time for removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in a direction that opposes the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the force that the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the restraining member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the replacement time is shortened by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by elastic force, the second moving member moves first when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. It is possible to prevent it from coming off the member.

The game machine H1 includes a hook member that holds the restraining member to the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member so that the restraining member can not move. The gaming machine H2 is arranged at a part of a movable position in a direction of being pressed against the first moving member.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member, so that the hook member is first placed. Before attaching to the moving member, the space for attaching the hook member becomes an empty space, so that it becomes easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member is changed from the first moving member to the elastic member. It is possible to prevent the elastic force from separating in the vertical direction.

Further, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction of being pressed against the first moving member of the restraining member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member accordingly.

In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the restraining member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member, so that the hook member can be attached. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member when it comes off or is forgotten to be assembled, and the maintenance time can be shortened.

Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member is removed from the first moving member, the hook member can be dropped to the outside of the first moving member, and the hook member can be dropped. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

Further, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be further contracted by the size of the locking projection for locking the hook member from the first moving member so that it cannot be pulled out. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member is increased. It can be suppressed. As a result, the hook member can be attached while maintaining a large elastic force of the elastic member and maintaining a large strength of holding the second moving member and the restraining member in the first moving member (while using a hard elastic member). It can be easy.

The game machine H3 is characterized in that the hook member can be removed from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by the elastic force, so that the hook member is first. Since it is removable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being removed illegally.

In any of the game machines H2 to H4, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by invading the restraining member at the position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, a space in which the hook member is arranged is vacant due to a break of the hook member, and the restraining member invades the space to obtain a second. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the cushioning action against the load applied to the second moving member after the space where the hook member has been arranged is vacated due to breakage of the hook member or the like. , It is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

As the configuration of the hook member, for example, one that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while the hook member is broken, so that it is easy to confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

In any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulling state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is possible to form.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form a pulled-out state and a locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. In some cases, it is possible to switch between a state in which the fraud prevention performance can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

In the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by the restraining member invading the inside of the space in which the hook member is arranged while the holding member is held by the hook member. The game machine H7.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by invading the restraining member into the vacant space when the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the second moving member.

Further, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from the normal position, a pulled-out state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, so that maintenance performance is improved. Can be made to.

<Example of technical concept to change the rotational resistance of the spherical part to the connecting member>
An operating member configured to be operable by a player and a connecting member that movably supports the operating member are provided, and a movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction is provided to the connecting member. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making it variable.

A gaming machine including a connecting member and an operating member configured to be movable with respect to the connecting member is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, the operating feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connecting member and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player can control the operation member. Since the relationship between the operating direction and the rotational resistance is always constant, there is little awareness (discovery) that occurs in the player due to the operation of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the variable means for changing the movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member is provided, the operation when the operating member is operated in the same direction is provided. It is possible to change the operation feeling of the member, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player who operates the operation member.

In addition, as the mode of the variable means, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of adjusting by the position of the connecting member, the mode of adjusting by the displacement amount of the operating member, and the mode other than the operating member and the connecting member An embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member (for example, a member for driving a connecting member) is exemplified.

For example, according to an embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be known only by touching the operating member, and the player can understand the state. It is possible to raise the attention to the operating members of.

Further, when the connecting member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be switched between strength and weakness with the movement resistance of the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body as a boundary. While requesting the player to operate only the operating member, in some cases, it is easier to move the operating member with respect to the connecting member than to move the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body, and the operating member with respect to the connecting member. It is possible to switch between situations where it is easier to move the connecting member to the game machine body than to move it (difference from pressing the push button).

The game machine I1 is characterized in that the connecting member is configured to be movable, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connecting member.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the strength of the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. The movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed regardless of the connection member.

In addition, as a mode of adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, a mode of changing the movement resistance according to the movement amount of the connecting member or a movement resistance triggered by the arrangement of the connecting member at a predetermined position. An embodiment of switching between the above is exemplified.

The game machine I2 includes an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operating member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, and a wall member that is arranged so as to come into contact with the operating member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is given a load from the wall member in the first direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, and the operating member receives the load in the first direction. A game machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, when the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member comes into contact with the wall member and the operating member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member that stands still is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than a predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

The game machine I2 is characterized by including a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the operating member moves according to the area of rubbing from the beginning of rotation. The dynamic friction can be applied to the operating member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

Examples of the arrangement position of the friction member include a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the connecting member and a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the main body case that supports the connecting member.

The game machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connecting member inside the box and a cover member that is arranged outside the main body case, and the friction member extends from the cover member to the connecting member side. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part to be installed.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate the replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged on the connecting member. ..

In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operating member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. The gaming machine I6, characterized in that it is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

According to the game machine I6, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed depending on whether the operating member receives the dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or the dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two stages.

In the game machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting the position of the center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being struck.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member, so that the movement of the operation member is performed. The load applied to the operating member can be reduced as compared with the case where the moving resistance of the operating member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

Further, since the rotational resistance in the rotational direction for lifting the weight member can be improved when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis can be reversed by moving the weight member. , The direction in which the rotational resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the feeling of operation given to the player can be changed.

In addition, as a mode of moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to the change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An embodiment in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device that is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member, and a resistance changing member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operating member by displacement. I8, wherein the resistance changing member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member is adjusted by displacement the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device that drives the connecting member, so that additional driving is performed. Without the device, the moving resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member at all.

Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only when the player touches it, and the value for the player of touching the operating member can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed when the operating member is in an advantageous state, it can be notified that the operating member is in an advantageous state in a form known only to the operating player. ..

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine J1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine J2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine J3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detector)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member, operation part)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (regulatory member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Support member 13312c Hook member (lock member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contact member)
14333c2 Convex part (first convex part)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Main body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Convex part (second convex part)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (1st urging device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member, urging member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the player is moving member to move between a first position and a second position by operation, there is a gaming machine provided with a vibration device (patent document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-120741

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the vibration transmission of the vibration device .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving vibration transmission of a vibrating device .

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, a predetermined member that moves between a first position and a second position by operation of the player, and can generate vibration are arranged in the predetermined member The vibrating device and the urging means for urging the predetermined member toward the first position or the second position are provided, and the vibration direction of the vibrating device and the vibration due to the movement of the predetermined member are provided. The moving direction of the device is tilted with each other .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the vibration transmission of the vibration device can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine on the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member in the XIVc-XIVc line of FIG. 14 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member in the XVc-XVc line of FIG. 15 (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a side view of the operating device in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member of FIG. 18A. It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in line XX-XX of FIG. 17B. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 17 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device in the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a side view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of the main body member, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. .. (A) is a front view of the unlocked cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocked cam member in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a). (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) are front views of the main body member of the swinging member illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of the motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state which the U-shaped member was slid and moved from the state. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the third embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front view exploded perspective view of the operation device in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the lock member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side surfaces of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). It is a figure. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine and the operating device viewed in cross section along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the inner case member in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of an eccentric cam member in a directional view. (A) is a front view of the unlock cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is a bottom view of FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view of. (A) is a front view of the lock member, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) to (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member showing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member. (A) and (b) are the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in chronological order according to the sixth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) and (b) are schematic views of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member which represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlock cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the seventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the ninth embodiment. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to the tenth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member and the lever member in the twelfth embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front view exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front view disassembled perspective view of the main body member, the upper cover member, the lower cover member and the swinging member of a lever member. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the swing operation member. (A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the front cover, the back cover, the separation prevention cover and the protective cover in. (A) is a perspective view of the back side frame member, and (b) is the back side frame member in the direction view (direction view from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall) indicated by the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the hook member, (b) is a front view of the hook member in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow of FIG. 85 (a). It is a side view of the hook member in the LXXXVc direction view, and FIG. 85 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the hook member in the line LXXXVd-LXXXXVd of FIG. 85 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the support member, (b) is a top view of the support member in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is a top view of the support member of FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of the support member in -LXXXVIc line. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is the back side. It is a partial top view of a frame member and a posture correction device, (d) is a partial sectional view of a back side frame member and a posture correction device in line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and the posture correction apparatus in line 87 (d) LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe. (A) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXVIIIb-LXXXXVIIIb of FIG. 88 (a). , (C) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). Yes, (e) is a partial top view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device, and (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e). Is. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) is a front view of the lock member according to the 14th embodiment, and (b) is a side view of the lock member in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) to (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member and the posture switching device. (A) and (b) are top views of the contact member in the fifteenth embodiment, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb line of FIG. FIG. 3D is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member and the posture correction device in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member and a posture correction device. (A) to (d) are side views of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 17th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 19th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the twentieth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It is a rear view of the swing operation member in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. 104A. (A) and (b) are partial sectional views of the operation device in 21st Embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device according to the 22nd embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, balls to the first winning opening 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). (State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. Therefore, in the variation display of the second symbol, "○" ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, toward the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning opening 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening. The out openings are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335a, 337a and a vibrating device 366.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) notifies the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by the player, and the swing operation member 310 includes a storage recess 17a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area formed by the accommodating recess 15a recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the horizontal direction of the unit 15 is movable.

There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recesses 15a and 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can grip the swing operation member 310 in a manner of grasping it from above. When the swing operation member 310 is gripped from above, the finger inserted between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodating recess 17a is caught on the back side surface of the swing operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if the force is relaxed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from slipping off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player to maintain his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is in a downward position (push-down position in the present embodiment). ) Is shown, and the hand holding the swing operation member 310 is shown by an imaginary line.

The accommodating recess 15a of the lower plate unit 15 and the accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 are arranged so as to be sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when the player grips the swing operation member 310 and pushes it down, it is possible to prevent the player from pinching a finger between the swing operation member 310 and the accommodation recess 15a and the accommodation recess 17a.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his finger on the intermediate frame member 312 to grip the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as the push button portion is arranged facing the palm, so that the player can push the vibrating member 310 by grasping the swinging operation member 310 while holding it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or changing the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

The lens member 317 arranged on the swing operation member 310 is arranged at a position where it hits the palm when the player grips the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, the vibration can be transmitted to the player (palm, fingers, etc.), and the vibration is the game. It is possible to prevent the situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be determined, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of not being able to concentrate can be solved.

Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand while the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether or not the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It becomes difficult for a player other than the player holding the swinging operation member 310 to grasp (whether or not it is moving). Therefore, it is possible to notify only the player who holds the swing operation member 310 of the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front-rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. As a result, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, so that the player can feel that he / she is operating.

When the player grips the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings on the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught on the back side frame member 311. By bending the back side frame member 311 in a manner of drawing an arc having the center of the radius of curvature on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7B, Even in a posture in which the wrist is stiffened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, it is possible to prevent the fingertip from coming off from the back side frame member 311.

Further, by catching the fingertip on the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely secured.

As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player, and the wrist naturally returns. Therefore, the operation of pushing the swing operation member 310 inward (see FIG. 22B) can be performed by extending the wrist in a manner of releasing the return of the wrist. As a result, the burden on the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 6, as compared with the arm length R1 from the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, from the upper end of the swing operation member 310. The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 310, is long. Thereby, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated around the shaft support rod 363, it can be easily rotated (with a light force). On the other hand, when a hand is placed on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to rotate (erroneously operate) the swing operation member 310 around the shaft support rod 363, a large force can be required. Therefore, the burden on the player when gripping the upper part of the swing operation member 310 and rotating the swing operation member 310 can be reduced, and the player puts his / her hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 to move his / her neck. It is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, in the operation device 300, the swing operation member 310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

FIG. 9 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 9 shows a state in which the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed inside the outer case member 320.

As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed on the back side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from above into a convex portion 321a projecting rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, and a front cover 321 and an upper cover. The left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 and the inner case member 330 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which the flange portions 321b and 322a extending in the left and right directions of the 322 are internally fitted. Mainly includes a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a overhanging and arranged inside the above.

By fastening and fixing the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324, and fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized in the front view. Therefore, it is possible to prevent mischief by disassembling the operation device 300.

The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler-type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler-type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2 thereof. It mainly includes a third sensor member 325a3 of a photocoupler type, which is arranged below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown, and the inner case member 330 is shown in a disassembled state.

As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, wherein the relative phases of the eccentric cam member 333 are invariant. A first drive device 335 that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that is projected from the left cover member 331. A second drive device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside to generate a driving force that rotates the lock member 336, and a gear damper 338 that is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 340. , Is mainly provided.

The left cover member 331 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the right, and has a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b offset to the left side (back side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extending to the right from the edges of the lower side wall portion 331a and the upper side wall portion 331b. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-shaped members that are projected to the right from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the posture of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331d projecting to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Mainly includes a bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 331g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the lever support shaft 331d.

The right cover member 332 is a bottomed tubular member having an opening formed to the left, and has a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (right portion in FIG. 10) and a lower side thereof. A plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332b offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and a plate-shaped upper side wall portion 332a and an upper side wall portion 332b extending to the left from the edges of the front side. A plate-shaped connecting side wall portion 332c that is in contact with the left cover member 331 except for the upper portion and a pair of circular shapes are bored in the lower side wall portion 332a, and the gear portion of the second drive device 337 is formed. The drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, the plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, the sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched to the right. A bottomed tubular shaft support portion 332g that internally fits and supports the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the rod-shaped member 331d, and an annular convex portion that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b. Mainly provided with 332i.

The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a 1/4 circular shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when the front side upper portion is viewed in the left-right direction (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are formed. Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper part on the front side.

The cutouts 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement of the lever support shaft 331d1 which is a swinging shaft in the extending direction). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the 1/4 circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four cylindrical members in this embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d includes a lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. It mainly includes a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the lock shaft 331d3 and an auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member in which the lever member 340 is swingably supported, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member through which the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are inserted in a phase-aligned state.

The lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are both shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted, the lock shaft 331d3 is a member to which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is pivotally supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is locked. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, a circular guide support hole 331e1 arranged on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1 and along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and a circular shape arranged on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1. The gear damper insertion hole 331e2, which is a through hole through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and the drive member insertion hole 331e3, which is arranged below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is formed in a combination of a pair of circular shapes, are formed. Mainly prepare.

In the guide support hole 331e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted to guide the swing of the lever member 340, and the end of the swing of the lever member 340 is defined by an end portion.

The sensor member 331f detects that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f, and detects the posture of the lock member 336.

The drive member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected. Therefore, by adjusting the shape of each circle, the drive gear 337b of the second drive device 337 can be made large. The pedestal portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle in a state where the right cover member 332 is projected to the left through the circle.

As a result, the drive gear 337b is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported by the second drive device 337 (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the inserted second drive device 337 It is possible to achieve both fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having the same diameter as the pedestal of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b).

In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 which is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction and guides the angle control rod member 346 of the lever member 340, and a rectangular shape arranged on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. The first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and the rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is arranged at a position rotated around the shaft support portion 332g. It mainly includes a second sensor insertion hole 332e3 into which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted.

The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap are inserted.

The torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-shaped torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are arranged below the front and lower portions of the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332.

In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h from above, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating rod member 346 from below. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

The annular convex portion 332i is a portion to which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

The first drive device 335 mainly includes a drive motor 335a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 335a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 335b is meshed with the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the driving force is transmitted.

The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and has a main body portion 336a whose tip end side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and a shaft formed on the base end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-like protrusion from the base end side of the main body portion 336a toward the outside of the shaft support hole 336b in the axial direction. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d to be provided, and a plate-shaped detection piece 336e extending outward in the axial direction of the shaft support hole 336b and allowing passage through a gap of the sensor member 331f.

The guide hole 336c is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 336c can define the swing end of the lock member 336.

The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a driving force and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a and is rotationally driven. The drive gear 337b is meshed with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the driving force is transmitted.

The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to a member that rotates in teeth, and the gear member is projected to the right side (inside the inner case member 330) of the left cover member 331 through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear thereof. The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives a viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. In FIG. 11, a state in which the back side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310 is shown, and the gear damper receiving member 342, the posture detection member 343, and the destruction prevention are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340. The state in which the peeling member 350 arranged as is disassembled is shown.

The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper portion projects (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is fastened and fixed to a main body member 341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose visual outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape, and a gear damper receiving member 342 which is coaxially supported by the gear damper receiving member 342 and whose axial outer shape is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341. The posture detection member 343 to be fixed, the upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits the circular portion of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 from above, and the upper cover member 344 sandwiching the main body member 341. Coaxially with the lower cover member 345 arranged to face each other, the angle control rod member 346 inserted into the tubular portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the tubular portion 343a of the posture detection member 343, and the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341. It mainly includes a peeling member 350 that is pivotally supported, and a swinging member 360 that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341.

The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a tubular tubular portion 342a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. Further, the posture detection member 343 is axially located at a position (back side in FIG. 11) that is farthest from the tubular portion 343a inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341 and the tubular portion 343a. It mainly includes a plate-shaped sensor detection piece 343b extending along the line.

The tubular portions 342a and 343a are portions to be inserted into the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted into the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

The gear portion 342b is a portion that is meshed with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion capable of detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

The peeling member 350 is a plate-shaped main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 arranged coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340 and inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and on the upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 arranged above the raising member 353 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and formed from a magnetic material.

The magnet member 354 is arranged to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 has a function of combining or separating the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

FIG. 12 is a frontal disassembled perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swing member 360 of the lever member 340.

The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a in the left-right direction, and a pair of shaft holes 341b thereof. The regulation hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b and the front end of the main body 341a are inclined downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extension direction of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swing member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the root side of the swing member support portion 341d, and a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The regulation hole 341f is mainly provided.

The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the tubular portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the shaft of the shaft hole 341b.

The regulation hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle regulation rod member 346 is supported.

The shaft hole 341e is a through hole through which the shaft support rod 363 that pivotally supports the swing member 360 is inserted, and the regulation hole 341f is a through hole through which the regulation rod 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swing member 360 is inserted. Is. The inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the regulation hole 341f because the cushioning member 364 is arranged around the shaft support rod 363.

The upper cover member 344 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and has an embodiment of forming a curved surface along a circle centered on a shaft hole 341b on the back surface side. The guide portion 344a, the outer fitting portion 344b which is connected to the guide portion 344a and is formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from above, and the guide portion 344a and the outer It mainly includes a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The thickness of the connecting portion 344c is reduced (see FIG. 22).

The lower cover member 345 is a member formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centered on the shaft hole 341b. The back guide portion 345a is formed, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and the rear guide portion 345a sandwiching the outer fitting portion 345b. It mainly includes a front curved surface portion 345c arranged on the side and curved toward the front side, and a front surface guide portion 345d extending from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

The back guide portion 345a is a portion arranged along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are arranged so as to cover the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. As a result, the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a can prevent dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inner case member 330.

Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swing of the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives the displacement of the swing member 360 in the rotational direction and the impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in, and the front guide portion 345d causes the swing member 360 to move in the axial direction. It is suppressed that the position shifts to.

Since the lower cover member 345 is arranged to face the lower end of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) is pushed down when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed from the metal material) of the lever member 340 from directly contacting the lever member 340. That is, by disposing the lower cover member 345 formed of the resin material between them, it is possible to alleviate the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 come into contact with each other.

The swing member 360 is a member that is arranged at the front end of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and is swingable around the shaft hole 341e, and is located on the lateral side of the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361a to be arranged and formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a shaft support coaxially with the main body member 361 while being locked to a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362 to be formed, the cylindrical shaft support rod 363 inserted into the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The cushioning member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, the cylindrical regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362. A vibration device 366 composed of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the surface is mainly provided.

The main body member 361 is coaxially and circularly bored with a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions 361a arranged to face each other, a front wall portion 361b connecting the side wall portions 361a at an end portion on the front side, and a pair of side wall portions 361a. A shaft hole 361c in which the cushioning member 364 is installed, an elongated angle regulation hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c and through which the regulation rod 365 is inserted, a side wall portion 361a, and a side wall portion 361a. It mainly includes a fixing plate portion 361e which is bent on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b in a direction away from each other and to which the swinging operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

Since the outer shape of the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c with the back side end portion of the side wall portion 361a slid. It can be rocked.

The shaft hole 361c is externally fitted and supported by the cushioning member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. As a result, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swing member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

The angle regulating hole 361d includes a cushioning member 361d1 formed of a resin material. The cushioning member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. As a result, the impact when the regulation rod 365 comes into contact with the angle regulation hole 361d can be suppressed.

The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 362a that is vertically locked to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right ends of the main body portion 362a. , Is mainly provided.

The main body portion 362a is locked by having a protrusion 362a1 projecting on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

The side wall portion 362b is a portion in which a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e is bored and is externally supported by the cushioning member 364, and is arranged inside the swing member support portion 341d in the left-right direction. That is, the swing member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

The cushioning member 364 is a tubular member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside, and the insertion portion 364a on the insertion tip side is formed to have a small diameter, and the root portion 364b is formed on the root side of the insertion portion 364a. Is formed to have a larger diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

Of those supported by the cushioning member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

The vibrating device 366 is a device that causes a pair of members to move close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 362 and has a copper wire wound around it. A disc-shaped bobbin member 366a, a cylinder having an outer diameter smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder having an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are arranged coaxially. It mainly includes a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose inner cylinder changes polarity in the axial direction.

One end of the torsion spring SP2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP2 urges the swing member 360 in the direction of tilting with respect to the main body member 341.

FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. Note that in FIG. 13, the back side frame member 311 is not shown. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the back side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the back side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361e of the swing member 360. A vibration guide member 313 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312 and the intermediate frame member 312 are in phase with each other, and the vibration guide member 313. A vibrating member 314 formed in a disk shape having no hole in the center and a vibrating coil spring CS1 fixed to the central portion of the vibrating member 314 are sandwiched. The switch member 315 which is arranged to face the vibrating member 314, the intermediate member 316 which is externally fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are housed on the back side and are externally supported by the vibrating member 314. The lens member 317 is mainly provided.

According to the above-described configuration, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. ..

The intermediate frame member 312 has a ring-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer circumference of the bottom portion 312a over the entire circumference, and a front side in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. Mainly includes a plurality of cylindrical switch support rods 312c erected in the above, and a back button member 312d movably arranged on the upper part of the back surface side of the bottom portion 312a in the front-rear direction.

The bottom portion 312a includes a rectangular recessed portion 312a1 that is recessed from the radial direction toward the center side at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of FIG.

The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the tip end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Therefore, the switch member 315 is arranged so as not to be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

The switch support rod 312c is a member that is commonly inserted into the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 from tilting in the operating direction when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of resistance in the pushing operation of the lens member 317, and it is possible to improve the operability of the pushing operation. .. Further, when the vibrating member 314 is vibrated by the vibrating device 366, the tilting of the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

Here, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 means a vibration in which the member vibrates finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, collides with another member at the end of the movement, and returns.

The back button member 312d is usually arranged at a position overhanging to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the back button member 312d and includes a plate-shaped detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

The vibration guide members 313 are arranged on the front side at the lower end, with a plurality of light guide members 313a (8 in this embodiment) erected on the front side, a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rods 312c are inserted, and a lower end portion. It mainly includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 313c to be provided, and a photocoupler type second sensor member 313d arranged on the back side at the upper end portion.

The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is arranged on the back surface side. The light guide member 313a is inserted into the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 so that the tip end portion thereof is arranged (closely arranged) with respect to the lens member 317. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member), the vibrating member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operating direction. And when the switch member 315 is tilted, it comes into contact with the light guide member 313a, and it is possible to prevent the light guide member 313a from being damaged.

The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) arranged on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects the swinging posture of the swinging operation member 310, which will be described later.

The vibrating member 314 has a substantially disk-shaped main body 314a having a cross-sectional outer diameter shape substantially the same as that of the bottom portion 312a and having no hole formed in the central portion, and a plurality of vibrating members 314 through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted. Switch support holes 314b (4 locations in this embodiment), a central tubular portion 314c that is projected in a cylindrical shape from the center of the main body 314a to the front side and around which the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and a switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted following the push-in coil spring CS2 from the tip of the sensor, and a sensor accommodating hole 314e formed in a shape capable of accommodating the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower part of the main body 314a. It mainly includes a light guide hole 314f through which a light guide member 313a can be inserted.

The elastic modulus of the push-in coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibration coil spring CS1.

Since the main body portion 314a is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the bottom portion 312a, the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through the recessed portions formed at four locations on the outer peripheral portion.

The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member having a large diameter portion 314d1 formed on the front side having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The push-in coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

The switch member 315 includes a main body portion 315a formed in a disk shape, a spring receiving portion 315b formed overhanging the cup from the central portion of the main body portion 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch. A switch support hole 315c through which the support rod 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members arranged at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). It is possible to pass through the gap between the guide shaft 315e inserted through the 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the first sensor member 313c, and the lower part of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13). ), The plate-shaped detection piece 315 g, which is projected on the back surface side, is mainly provided.

The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support rod 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. As a result, when the switch member 315 moves in a direction close to the vibrating member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large diameter portion 314d1.

Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibrating member 314 can be suppressed.

The intermediate member 316 is provided with a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fitted and fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is the XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in line.

As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body 333a formed as a rotary gear, a tubular tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with the rotation axis of the main body 333a, and a tubular portion 333b thereof. A cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b and formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 333b and having a hollow inside, and a cam portion 333c extending in the axial direction along the tip of the tubular portion 333b. A pair of notches 333d to be cut out, a plate-shaped rib portion 333e connecting the tubular portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disk-shaped umbrella covering the gear portion of the main body portion 333a. Mainly includes a portion 333f.

The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be displaced in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when it comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c slightly bends inward (elastically deforms) to absorb the impact.

The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

The notch 333d is for making the phase relative to the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) invariant, and a pair of notches arranged to face each other are formed having different lengths in the circumferential direction. This makes it possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being assembled by reversing it by 180 degrees.

The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the position farthest from the tubular portion 333b of the cam portion 333c and the tubular portion 333b are connected to each other, so that the strength of the hollow cam portion 333c is the highest. The strength of the weakened part can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 333c from being damaged.

The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. As a result, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib portion 333e, and the rib portion 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is large. The portions can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress fatigue of the rib portion 333e while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), so that the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made to.

15 (a) is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15 (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15 (c) is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15 (a). It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a tubular shape whose diameter is expanded in the middle, and is externally fitted to the eccentric camshaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10). The shaft support portion 334a and the shaft support portion thereof. A diameter-expanded portion 334b that is connected to 334a and whose diameter is increased toward the front side (upper in FIG. 15C) (the diameter is expanded in two steps) and the axial direction from the front end of the diameter-expanded portion 334b. 334c, which is a plate-shaped detection piece, and 334d, which has a shape corresponding to the notch 333d, are mainly provided.

The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to the annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. By supporting the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 on the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i and supporting the enlarged diameter portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 from the inner peripheral side on the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is firmly supported. It can be supported and the eccentric camshaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when a load is applied from the radial direction.

The detection piece 334c is allowed to pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose phase relative to the phase detection member 334 is invariant is detected by meshing the detent projection 334d and the notch 333d. can do.

16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb of FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. 16 (c) is a side view of the lever member 340. 16 is a top view of the lever member 340 in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16A.

As shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line oriented in the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and lower than the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b as compared with the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A). ) Below). As a result, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swing member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed in the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 is arranged on the U-shaped open side. There is a slight gap between the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341.

As a result, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (lower side of FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state fixed to the main body member 341, or when the peeling member 350 approaches the main body member 341 from the peeled state (see FIG. 23A). It is possible to increase the movement resistance when moving to.

As a result, the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341 can be increased. For example, the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 is overloaded and the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from swinging at high speed due to the force of the applied load.

FIG. 17 (a) is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the operation device 300 in the direction of arrow XVIIb of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17 shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position (a state in which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310).

18 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 18 (b) is a portion of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIb-XVIIIb of FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 18 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). Further, FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18A. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly enlarged from FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibrating device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side while the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 hits the lower side surface of the release member 350. When the lock member 336 is brought into contact with the upper side surface, the release member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, so that the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position.

As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the part where the lock member 336 stops the swing of the peeling member 350 with the peeling member 350 in between. When is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the release member 350 is dampened by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in a design manner.

In the present embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the release member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side of the release member 350 and the tubular portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only when is in contact with the peeling member 350.

In other words, the length of the main body portion 336a of the lock member 336 is formed so that the L-shaped hook portion abuts on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 abuts on the tubular portion 333b. ..

Therefore, when the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the release member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the release member 350. Is abutted on the side of. Therefore, when an overload is applied in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from the state where the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged, and it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back surface side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are meshed with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swing of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force to resist the load when the lever member 340 receives a load of pushing backward. Have a combination.

By disposing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 rises due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

As a result, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the degree of freedom in designing the torsion spring SP1 is improved. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 18C, in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 is arranged. The 334c is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. That is, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is arranged in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

Further, as will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 does not swing from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thereby, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 in line XX-XX of FIG. 17 (b). The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is arranged on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is urged by the coil spring in the direction away from the intermediate frame member 312, so that the pushing load (directed upward in FIG. 20). The detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d in a state where the load is not applied. On the other hand, a pushing load (load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d has been pushed.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the vibrating device 366 operates from the states of FIGS. 18 (a) and 19 and a load is generated upward, and FIG. 21 (b) shows FIG. 18 (a). ) And the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 19 is shown.

As described above, the switch member 315 is locked from the intermediate frame member 312 so as not to be pulled out, and the vibrating member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibrating member 314 is the vibrating coil spring CS1. Is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 side (downward in FIG. 21A).

From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibrating member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated by the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of being pressed. As a result, the lens member 317, which is externally fitted and fixed to the vibrating member 314, moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is brought into contact with the switch member 315, it becomes difficult to push the lens member 317 (hardened, unable to push).

On the other hand, when the vibrating member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

Further, since the lens member 317 is configured to be in a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the lens member 317 is immovably fixed and cannot be pushed in, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

For example, when the player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the lens member 317 intermittently, when the lens member 317 returns from the pushed state, the lever member 340 reacts to the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a). ), The swing operation member 310 receives a load in a direction approaching). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the push-in is not possible, the entire swing operation member 310 is pushed down in response to the push-in operation of the player, so that the lever member 340 also separates from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the lens member 317, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other due to the swinging operation member 310 returning upward due to the urging force.

As a method of configuring the non-pushable state, the lens member 317 is locked with a hook-shaped claw, or the lens member 317 is moved to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor that reciprocates linearly. An example is a method of projecting (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the terminal position by a vibrating device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device 366 vibrates the lens member 317 and makes the lens member 317 in an inaccessible state. Both effects can occur.

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibrating device 366, the moving direction of the pressing member 366b can be reversed. Here, since the vibrating member 314 is not pulled by the force of electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slowed down. However, in the present embodiment, the vibrating member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1. 21 (b) moves downward in accordance with.

As a result, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be increased in speed without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step portion 317a formed on the back surface side of the lens member 317 comes into contact with the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member The 317 and the vibrating member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the degree of contraction of the vibrating coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibrating coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance during the pushing operation of the lens member 317.

After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that comes into contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before pushing (see FIG. 18A).

That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, and the vibrating coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibrating member 314 can be composed of different members.

In the present embodiment, since the elastic modulus of the pushing coil spring CS2 is smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration passively felt by the player.

22 (a) and 22 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B, the state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side is illustrated, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged at the upward position. The state is illustrated, and in FIG. 22B, the state in which the swinging operation member 310 is pushed toward the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state shown in FIG. 22A is shown.

The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 22A) about the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the release direction (clockwise in FIG. 22A) from the state shown in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

The swing of the lever member 340 due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the guide support holes 331e1, 332e1, the upper cover 322 and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of points to be contacted when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. .. Hereinafter, each contact point will be described in detail.

Since the angle regulating rod member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the angle regulating rod member 346 comes into contact with the end of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 to stop the swing of the lever member 340. Can be done. As described above in FIG. 10, since the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1 are arranged so as to sandwich the lever member 340 in the swing axis direction, the lever member 340 is centered in the longitudinal direction when the lever member 340 is stopped. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a stepped portion 344c1 which is a portion perpendicularly in contact with the upper cover 322, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 comes into contact with the step portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that the impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be alleviated. it can.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the impact to the main body member 341, so that the configuration of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight of the lever member 340 as a whole can be reduced. In this case, the elastic modulus required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) for driving the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed accordingly.

In addition to the role of cushioning the impact, the upper cover member 344 also has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls, game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330. That is, even if the lever member 340 swings (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that dust is inside the inner case member 330. And balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 22A). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main body member 341 from wobbling in the swing axis direction by using the upper cover member 344.

The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. By bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L1 indicating the central axis of the vibration device 366 in the vibration direction passes through the shaft support rod 363. Therefore, the impact of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12) is arranged between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be alleviated by the cushioning member 364. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

The angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is defined as the angle θ1. As a result, the vibration generated by the vibrating device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, which is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 and vibrates the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to suppress the load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2).

Similarly, the force applied to the lens member 317 in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

The vibrating device 366 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction generated when the vibrating device 366 operates is in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the main body member 341. Be directed. Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can cause the main body member 341 to swing in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being loaded by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

As shown in FIG. 22B, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c in a state where the swinging operation member 310 is pushed in. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed in the direction of pushing down the swing member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 with the lever support shaft 331d1 as the center. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of a load on the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the swing operation member 310.

In the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since this angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the directional component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibrating device 366 can be made smaller than the state shown in FIG. 22 (a). Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swinging operation member 310.

Further, the directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to easily swing the lever member 340 counterclockwise in FIG. 22 (b) by utilizing the reaction of the vibration, and the mode of vibration felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is set. It is possible to generate a plurality of types of vibrations, that is, vibration in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibration in which the swing operation member 310 rotates around the shaft support rod 363.

23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 23 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 on the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. 17 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 23, a state in which the main body member 341 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown. The cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, a predetermined amount or more of a load (a load greater than the attractive force due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a predetermined amount or more of the load (due to the magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is peeled off from the magnet member 354 by applying a load (load equal to or greater than the attractive force), and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. As a result, a large load is applied between the lock member 336 and the release member 350, and it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 and the release member 350 from being damaged.

The eccentric cam member 333 is arranged on the opposite side in the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the eccentric cam member 333 is on the side. Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 23B, when the sensor detection piece 343b moves from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

In this case, the attractive force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 vigorously moves downward. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings too much, which may cause a load on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the back side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are arranged to face each other and come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 340 is pressed. Even if it turns too much, the load can be alleviated by deforming the back side frame member 311 or the front cover. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from being damaged.

By releasing the load applied downward by the player from the state shown in FIG. 23 (a), the main body member 341 is swung clockwise by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 to cause the main body member 341. Is again attracted to the peeling member 350. As a result, the posture (arrangement) of the lever member 340 (and the main body member 341) can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, which is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is the shaking of the main body member 341 when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. It does not take the direction of movement.

That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes depending on the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swinging operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 becomes larger. As a result, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, since the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341 to the U-shaped closing side, the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 When frictional resistance occurs between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam is in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged when the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again to form the main body. It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

24 (a) and 24 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 24 (a) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22 (a) to the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)), and FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung toward the release side (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is shown. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 swings to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 swings to the release side, the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335 is rotated to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 and swing the lever member 340. Can be made to. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched in the middle.

While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction of being pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1 (clockwise in FIG. 24A). Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. As a result, the player's attention can be easily attracted to the swing operation member 310.

When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, since the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of the vibration, it is possible to suppress the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by the operation of the vibration device 366.

Consider the case where the lens member 317 is pushed in and operated. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed in (FIG. 24 (FIG. 24). a) There is a possibility that the swing operation member 310 may swing (counterclockwise) or the swing operation member 310 may be pushed in (clockwise in FIG. 24 (a)).

In the present embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 acts, so that a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. As a result, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

25 (a) and 25 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state of FIG. 24 (b), and FIG. 25 (b) shows FIG. 24 (b). The state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, since the swing member 360 is urged to the front side (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 25), it is possible to facilitate the player to grasp the swing operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied to the direction M1 (see FIG. 25 (a)) from the state of FIG. 24 (b) in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swing operation member 310 can be immediately pushed down without swinging around the 363).

Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be forced to collide with the eccentric cam member 333 from a position separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. FIG. In 25 (a) and 25 (b), the swing operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. That is, it is possible to receive the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333 and prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, the features in the rotation direction will be described.

FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retracted phase”) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle of. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25 (a), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by rotating clockwise.

FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle of the eccentric cam member 333 from the phase (evacuation phase) in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 shown in FIG. 25 (b), it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by rotating counterclockwise. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant velocity, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsional spring SP1 and the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 are obtained by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise from the retracting phase. The period in which the eccentric cam member 333 opposes (the period in which the angle is φ1) can be shortened as compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (the period in which the angle is φ2).

Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. The position where the eccentric cam member 333 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in FIG. 25 (a) is shown in FIG. 25 (b). The lever support shaft 331d1 can be closer than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 come into contact with each other). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other becomes smaller. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, so that the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310, a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333, so that the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. 25 (b). In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25 (b), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). Since the distance from 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer), even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in a direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates in the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25 (a), the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 becomes large (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened), but since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating in the direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed at the contact position of the eccentric cam member 333, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

26 (a) and 26 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26 (a)) from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). In FIG. 26A, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated to the retracted phase and the lever member 340 is swung until it comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 is shown, and a cross section of the swing operation member 310 is shown. The sight is omitted.

Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is desired while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. 26A. It usually does not occur that the swing operation member 310 swings in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 26A) without swinging. Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d is pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310).

In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 to the retracted phase with the driving force of the drive gear 335b as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Can be prevented.

At this time, by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. 26B, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

27 (a) and 27 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 27 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24 (a), and FIG. 27 (b) shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A shows a state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise around the shaft support rod 363, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 opposite to the direction D1 from the state of FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains the same, and the swing operation member 310 is centered on the shaft support rod 363. It can be rocked. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the directions of the forces without requiring two types of operations (operations in different modes such as pushing and rotating), so that the operation device 300 can be operated. It can be easy.

During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (the state of being fixed by the attractive force of the magnet member 354 is maintained), so that it is possible to suppress a change in the operation feeling felt by the player. The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, whereby the lever member 340 is counterclockwise to FIG. 27 (b). The load is applied in the direction of rotating clockwise. As a result, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed to the position shown in FIG. 27 (a) when the swing operating member 310 is swung, and the swing operating member 310 is held in the state shown in FIG. 27 (b). Can be facilitated.

Next, the operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. It is formed of a separate member from the main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically supported. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in the direction of raising the lever member 2340 from the torsion spring SP21, and the swinging operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (clockwise in FIG. 28A). The urging force works.

The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of the torsion spring SP21 is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is urged in the direction of raising the swing operation member 310.

The torsion spring SP22 is wound and supported by a cushioning member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swing member 2360 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 28A) with respect to the main body member 341.

28 (a) and 28 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 according to the second embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 28A and FIG. 28B, the state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 28B, the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28 (a) is set as the initial position, and in FIG. 28 (a), the posture P21 at which the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Will be done. Further, although the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, it will be described as the operation device 2300. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibrating device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members in a manner in which a pair of members are brought close to each other in a linear direction by an electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around the circumference. The bobbin member 2366a, which is a tubular member around which a copper wire is wound, has a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and the inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a. It mainly includes a pressing member 2366b in which cylinders are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The inner cylinder of the pressing member 2366b is made of a magnetic material.

The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are shorter in radial length than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibrating device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support rod 363 (FIG. 28). (A) Arranged apart from the left side).

Here, when the swing operation member 310 is arranged as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold the lever member 2340 for the purpose of production. However, it was difficult to detect whether or not the player gripped the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed and held, but if the push button operation is frequently requested, the push button must be pushed with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button, so that the player must push the push button. May be stressful.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the central axis of the vibrating device 2366 is arranged apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 swings back and forth due to the reaction of the vibration of the vibrating device 2366, and the neck swings. The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in a mode of reciprocating and swinging between the posture shown in FIG. 28A and the posture P21. Along with this, before the player grips the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), so that the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20) By detecting with (see), it is possible to detect that the player has not yet grasped the swing operation member 310.

On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d Pattern changes. By detecting this change, it is possible to detect that the player has gripped the swing operation member 310.

Since there is no reaction force generated when the swing operation member 310 is gripped, the force required for the player is small. Further, it is sufficient that the swinging operation member 310 is covered with the player's hand (the player can immediately operate the swinging operation member 310). For example, the player puts his / her hand weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is possible to reduce the stress of the player because it is sufficient.

As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not it is in the preparatory stage for operation) without requesting the player to operate the push button. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the stress of the player due to requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swing member 2360 is used as an axis support, the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device 2366 and the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 are aligned to increase the vibration transmitted to the player side. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the central axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. It is possible to reduce the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the swing operation member 310). In addition, the vibration of the vibrating device 2366 can vibrate the lens member 317 while rotating the swing operation member 310, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

The rod-shaped member 2331d includes an unlocking shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28 (a)) extending in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

29 (a) and 29 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 29A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position while the lock member 2336 is placed on the release side. Further, FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 29 (a) to the end of rotation in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)).

Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29 (a)) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is maintained in a state of being pressed against the upper cover member 344.

When a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in the direction of further pushing down the swing operation member 310 from the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29 (a)), the swing operation member 310 moves. It rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). As a result, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player unintentionally passes the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent the load from being applied.

In the present embodiment, both the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) does not need to be arranged, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the unlock cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (C) is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (d) is a side view of the main body member 2333a in the direction of arrow XXXd of FIG. 30 (c). In addition, in FIG. 30C and FIG. 30D, the main body member 2333a is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), the cam member 2333b has a tubular portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) and a circle inscribed in the tubular portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends axially along the shaft and is formed slightly shorter than the tubular portion 2333b1 and has a hollow inside, and a pair of cuts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the tubular portion 2333b1. A plate-shaped rib portion 2333b4 that connects the notch 2333b3, the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in the direction passing through both axes, and the rib portion 2333b4 are projected from the rib portion 2333b4 in parallel with the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1. Mainly includes a convex portion 2333b5.

The convex portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position radially separated from the tubular portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. It is adhered to the rib portion 2333b4 with an adhesive or the like. The convex portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30A) are arranged so as to intersect the radial direction of the tubular portion 2333b1 along a circular shape centered on the tubular portion 2333b1. Is formed by.

The tubular portion 2333b1 corresponds to the tubular portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e, and the corresponding portions correspond to each other. Since the technical ideas are common, the description is omitted here.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (c) and 30 (d), the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section pivotally supported by an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center thereof. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. It mainly includes an annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape, and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is arranged in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

The distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22 of the annular recess 2333a3, and the width in the radial direction is slightly larger than the thickness of the convex portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 has a length equal to that of the modified R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). Further, the recessed depth of the annular recess 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the convex portion 2333b5 is disposed above the tubular portion 2333b1, the lever member 2340 to the cam member 2333b When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in the direction in which the convex portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 2333b5 from being pressed against the fixed magnet portion 2333a4, and it is possible to prevent deterioration due to rubbing between the magnets.

FIG. 31 is a view in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are assembled, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 31 (b) is FIG. 31 ( It is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 in the XXXIb direction view of a), and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. Note that FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a). In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), in a state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and assembled, the convex portion 2333b5 is circular. It is inserted through the ring recess 2333a3, and a magnetic force acts between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in the direction of attracting each other. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate integrally by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

At this time, the shape of the convex portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centered on the tubular portion 2333b1, and the area of contact with the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, so that the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force equal to or greater than the attractive force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is in a state where the reference line O representing the reference phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By being fixed and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be changed to a deviated state.

32 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the direction of XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlock cam member 2339 in the XXXIIc direction view of FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIG. 32, the unlock cam member 2339 is formed to have the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the main body is formed with gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b on the outer peripheral surface. A shaft hole 2339b formed in the center of the portion 2339a and the main body portion 2339a and into which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and a shaft hole 2339b extending outward in the radial direction along the front side surface of the main body portion 2339a. A release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. Mainly equipped with 2339d.

The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap of a detection sensor (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be detected.

33 (a) is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33 (b) is a side view of the lock member 2336 in the direction of XXXIIIb of FIG. 33 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and is formed in a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a whose tip side is formed in a substantially L-shaped hook shape and on the base end side of the main body portion 2336a. A shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and an unlock cam member of the main body 2336a. It mainly includes a locking portion 2336d that protrudes above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped hook-shaped portion) from the side surface on the side facing the 2339 (left side in FIG. 33B).

The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion (the side surface that abuts from the lower side of the lever member 2340) formed in the shape of an L-shaped hook abuts on the lever member 2340. It is regarded as an aspect.

The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the length of the guide hole 2336c can define the swing end of the lock member 2336.

The locking portion 2336c is a portion pushed from the unlocking portion 2339c of the unlocking cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the locking member 2336 receives an urging force toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A) from beginning to end.

34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the unlock cam member 2339, which show in chronological order that the lever member 2340 swings due to the rotation of the drive gear 335b. Is.

Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the unlock cam member 2339 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a). The state of being rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336 is shown, and in FIG. 34 (c), the state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side from the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the unlock cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position.

Further, FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 comes into contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the tubular portion 2333b1 (the side arranged at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above. In FIG. 35 (c), FIG. 35 The state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), when the release portion 2339c of the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 before it comes into contact with the lock portion of the lock member 2336, the unlock cam member 2339 needs to rotate at an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34B is reached, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the unlocked cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

In this way, since the cam member 2333b can rotate relative to the main body member 2333a, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocked cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by the 2340.

After the unlock cam member 2339 has rotated by the angle θ21, the unlock cam member 2339 starts to move the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released, so that the eccentric cam member 2333 The rotation causes the lever member 2340 to swing. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by a magnetic force and rotate integrally.

When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 is pulled out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34 (d)), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is thereafter regardless of the timing. (Fig. 34 (a) right end) pushes the curved surface of the hook-shaped part of the main body 2336a of the lock member 2336 to push the lock member 2336 to the release side, and further lowers the rear end of the lever member 2340. , The swing is naturally regulated.

Therefore, for example, when the player operates the swing operation member 310 in the lifting direction and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is shown in FIG. 34 (d) regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340. The swing is regulated by swinging the lever member 2340 to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture shown in FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 35 (b)).

Here, as a measure against the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed from an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming is conceivable. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is settled or the shape is changed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the player lifting the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). It is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged.

That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 in FIGS. 34 (d), 35 (a), or 35 (b)), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. When an upward load is applied to (see 28), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slides against the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Swing is regulated by being moved.

On the other hand, in this case, although the postures of the cam members 2333b are the same (see FIG. 35 (c)), the phases of the unlocked cam members 2339 may be different (FIGS. 34 (d) and 35 (a)). Or see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required to move the lock member 2336 to the release side by the lock release cam member 2339 is different again, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlock cam member 2339 can be matched.

As a result, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocked cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing when the player lifts and operates the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), and the lever member 2340 can be matched. The drive start timing can be easily matched.

Next, the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swing member 2360 illustrated in the axial direction of the shaft support rod 363. Note that FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillatedly arranged at the end on the backward rotation side (see FIG. 28 (a)), and FIG. 36 (b) shows the state at the end on the forward rotation side. A state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated (see FIG. 28 (b)) is shown, and in FIG. 36 (c), the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. 36 (b). The state of being slid and moved is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 36, the main body member 2361 is a member coaxially supported by the shaft support rod 363 with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a formed by being formed, the elongated hole 2361f formed from the shaft hole 361c along the extending direction of the fixing plate portion 361e, and the extension of the fixing plate portion 361e from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. It mainly comprises 2361 g of elongated holes formed along the direction.

As a result, unless at least the main body member 2361 is oscillated at the end on the forward rotation side, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 are arranged so as not to enter the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Therefore, the main body member 2361 only swings around the shaft support rod 363.

Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the direction of XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. 37 (c) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362. It is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing the state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid and moved from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). For ease of understanding, the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is shown by an imaginary line in FIGS. 37 (b) and 37 (c).

As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upper side of FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-shaped portions 2362c extending downward from the side, and a U-shaped member 2362d formed in the rod-shaped portions 2362c so as to be slidably movable and having a crotch width larger than the width of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. Mainly prepared.

The side wall portion 2362b includes an elongated hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged so that the crotch width direction of the U-shape is along the width direction of the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, and is urged in a direction away from the main body portion 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Will be done. That is, when no load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b), and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. , The shaft support rod 363 and the regulation rod 365 can be prevented from moving along the elongated holes 2361f, 2361g.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body portion 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is arranged at the position shown in FIG. 37 (c), and the U-shaped crotch portion is formed. Since it overlaps with the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support rod 363 and the regulating rod 365 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

That is, by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

Here, a member that slides the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped first release member 2370 is arranged inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 so as to be slidable along the longitudinal direction, and the back side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310. It mainly includes a plate-shaped second release member 2380 that is arranged so as to be slidably movable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the through hole to be arranged.

The first release member 2370 is arranged so that the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28 (a)) can be slidably moved, and the second release member 2380 is the U on the front side (left side in FIG. 28 (a)). The character member 2362d is arranged so as to be slidable.

Further, in the first release member 2370, when the release member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 2340, the main body member 351 comes into contact with the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d. It is said to be a shape. In the second release member 2380, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, the swing member 2360 rotates and is arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is arranged on the second release member 2380. The shape is such that it abuts on the end and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slidably moved, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29 (a)) is slid. Since the 2362d is not slid, the swing operating member 310 cannot be slid downward.

38 (a) and 38 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 38A, a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 28A and arranged in a downward position is shown. Further, FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a).

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position and is rotated and arranged at the swing end in the forward rotation direction. Then, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and moved, and the swinging operation member 310 can be slid and moved along the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g.

At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swing operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is further applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it can be determined that the player does not accidentally apply an overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and is about to destroy the swing operation member 310 regardless of the operation. it can.

Therefore, for example, by detecting the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) with a detection sensor (not shown) and issuing an alarm, it is possible to prevent the player from applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. However, it is possible to prevent the operating device 2300 from being destroyed.

When the swing operation member 310 is not overloaded, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from sliding, so that the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g provide a feeling of operation of the swing operation member 310. It can be prevented from changing.

Next, the operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be driven is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the third embodiment, the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 3340 forward from the torsion spring SP31, and the urging force acts in the direction of tilting the swing operation member 310 backward from the torsion spring SP32.

The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end of which is brought into contact with the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from above, and the other end is attached to the angle regulating rod member 346. It is abutted from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is urged in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 tilts forward.

The torsion spring SP32 is wound and supported around the cushioning member 364, one end thereof is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swing member 360 in the rising direction with respect to the main body member 341.

39 (a) and 39 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 according to the third embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). It should be noted that in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b), the state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the neck is changed from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is shown. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 39A is the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 3300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in the present embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. The solenoid mechanism will be described below.

The solenoid mechanism is composed of a magnetic material member 3339 formed from a magnetic material material arranged inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical member 3345f fixed to the lever member 3340 and made of metal. ..

The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e extending rearwardly and downwardly from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and integrally molded with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e thereof. A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and an electric current is conducted through the rod-shaped member 3345f.

The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending in pairs from the front side wall to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) of the inner cover member 3330. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n arranged on the upper side is the north pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s arranged on the lower side is the south pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight vertical gap from the locus in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339 when the lever member 3340 swings.

Here, for example, when an electric current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 39 (a), an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the rear (right side in FIG. 39 (a)). Further, when an electric current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force is generated that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (to the left in FIG. 39A). The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

40 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is arranged on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position.

In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of tilting forward, the lever member 3340 can be started to swing by arranging the lock member 336 on the release side.

When the lever member 3340 is urged in the direction of tilting forward as in the present embodiment, the eccentricity that drives the lever member 3340 toward the side where the lever member 3340 is close to the player when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310. It is necessary to arrange the cam member, and there is a problem that the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by the solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is arranged so as to leave a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod-shaped member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, collision between the rod-shaped member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the solenoid mechanism from being damaged when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

FIG. 40 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 40 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed downward and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b).

Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40 (b)), even if the player releases his / her hand from the state in FIG. 40 (b), the neck The swing operation member 310 does not immediately move up and is maintained in place.

Here, assuming that the urging direction of the lever member 340 is the rising direction, when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 peels off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged. Even if this can be prevented, the swing operation member 310 rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player does not notice that the swing operation member 310 is overloaded and repeatedly overloads the swing operation member 310. There was a problem that there was a risk of calling.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed to the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. You can keep it in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310.

In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force for driving the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. That is, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by receiving the electromagnetic force of the rod-shaped member 3345f.

Here, when the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), when the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged below the release member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member. When the swing of the 340 is regulated, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also regulated (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, there is a problem that a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the swing of the lever member 3340 is regulated by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for swinging the main body member 341, and the release member 350 swings. Since it is not used for motion, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b), and FIG. 41 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 41 (a). Therefore, the state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the rod-shaped member 3345f moves by receiving an electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is arranged below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the peeling member 350 to the lever member 340 The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission unit 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

FIG. 41 (a) shows the main body member 341 by passing an electric current through the rod-shaped member 3345 f from the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) toward the back side of the paper surface until the transmission portion 3345e changes its posture by the angle α31. The state shown in FIG. 41 (a) can be obtained by passing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) toward the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 41 (a) until the transmission unit 3345e changes its posture by the angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b).

By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state of FIG. 41 (a) and the state of FIG. 41 (b). As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

Further, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40 (a)), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed to incite the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300. Can perform operations. At this time, the path through which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the peeling member 350 is pulled from the main body member 341 by a single magnetic member 3339. It is possible to deal with the case where the peeling member 350 is attached to the main body member 341 and the case where the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341.

The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is passed, the speed of the fanning operation can be changed. As a result, the effect of the effect can be improved.

42 (a) and 42 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 3300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 42 (a) and 42 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without being viewed in cross section, and the player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. ..

FIG. 42 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side (right side of FIG. 42 (a)) of the swing operation member 310. From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of the paper surface in FIG. 42 (a), the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction. Due to the swing of the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught in the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). As a result, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and by detecting this with the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20), it is possible to determine whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

In this case, the player can perform the input operation simply by putting his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. Further, the timing at which the state of the back button member 312d changes (the swinging operation member 310 on which the player covers the hand swings in the forward rotation direction) depending on the mode (timing and strength) in which a current is passed through the rod-shaped member 3345f. Can be controlled. Therefore, the back button 312d is input on the control side by covering the swinging operation member 310 with the hand and controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f without asking the player for an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the player, for example, when performing an effect that requires input at the right time.

Further, if the player does not put his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310 but simply puts his / her hand on the lens member 317, for example, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). Even if it is swung, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, it is possible to specify an operation method for inputting in a timely manner, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

This is not possible in the form in which the eccentric cam member 333 is arranged behind and below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is provided on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a form in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 swings in the rising direction.

Next, the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 regulates the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment has a neck. The lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the illustration of the outer case member 320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 4330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is arranged inside, and an eccentric cam that is projected from the left cover member 4331. It mainly includes an eccentric cam member 4333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 projecting from the left cover member 331. Although the arrangement and orientation of the drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from those in the first embodiment, the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is the same as that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof will be omitted.

Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 4331d that are convex to the right from the upper side wall portion 331b and are formed in a cylindrical shape.

The rod-shaped member 4331d is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 arranged at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 arranged below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The lock shaft 4331d3 is mainly provided.

The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 with both sides.

The eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c, unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is formed larger than that of the cam portion 333c. Specifically, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position with the end of the cam portion 4333c aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to the size of the cam.

The lock member 4336 is arranged from below with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged near the downward position and the side of the lever member 4340 where the lock receiving member 4350 is arranged is arranged upward. It is a member that abuts and regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a).

The lock member 4336 includes a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape and a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped cross-section and the driving force of the second driving device 337 is transmitted by the meshing of gears. , Is mainly provided.

The main body member 4336a is bored in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A) of the main body portion 4336a1 formed in the shape of a long plate and the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. The shaft support hole 4336a2 to be formed, the locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 opposite to the transmission member 4336b, and the side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. A recessed portion 4336a4, which is recessed from the back surface side (right side in FIG. 44B) to the front surface side below the shaft support hole 4336a2, is mainly provided.

The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion in which the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion being locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c is locked (see FIG. 45). As a result, the main body member 4336a is constantly urged counterclockwise in FIG. 44 (b).

The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion of the transmission member 4336b that comes into contact with the convex portion 4336b4. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back surface side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member 4336a is put into the lock standby state (see FIG. 45A). The posture of the 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (holding the posture in a state where the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a fan shape in cross section and a gear portion meshed with the drive gear 337b is formed on the curved surface portion, and the main body portion 4336b1 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 44A). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the posture of the transmission member 4336b through a gap of a sensor member (not shown), and a main body. Mainly includes a convex portion 4336b4 which is projected from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 on the side facing the main body member 4336a and which is brought into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 in the swing direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

The convex portion 4336b4 is formed at the back end side end portion of the main body portion 4336b1. As a result, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in a direction close to the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back surface side surface of the main body member 4336a that swings due to the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

45 (a) and 45 (b) are side views of the lock member 4336. In addition, in FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B, the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are shown in an assembled arrangement.

The lock member 4336 can be configured into a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45 (a) and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. 45 (b). The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is arranged close to the connecting side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c.

Further, in the lock forced release state, the drive gear 337b rotates from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung in the direction away from the connecting side wall portion 331c, so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. It means a state in which the end portion is arranged at a position where it does not come into contact with the lever member 4340. In the locked forced release state, the convex portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b comes into contact with the concave portion 4336a4 and holds the posture of the main body member 4336a.

If the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a from above in the lock standby state, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 47 (a)). If the lock is forcibly released from the state in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted, the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 can swing (see FIG. 48).

Here, by putting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and turning the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6-1), as will be described later, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically regulated as the end portion on the contacting side gets over the lock member 4336 upward. On the other hand, by maintaining the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

FIG. 46 is a front exploded perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed into a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section, and a lock receiving member 4350 coaxially supported with a shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341. It is mainly composed of.

The main body member 4341 is arranged in a manner of compensating for the front main body portion 4341a which is formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a notch on the left side of the rear end portion (left side in FIG. 46) and the notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. An electromagnet member M41 that attracts the rear main body 4341a2 and the front main body 4341a1 only when it is fastened and fixed to the upper surface side of the rear main body 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section and the current is conducting. A pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1 are mainly provided.

The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and the main body portion 4351 and the front end portion of the main body portion 4351 in the left-right direction. 4352 is mainly provided with a shaft hole 4352 which is formed in the shaft hole 341b and is coaxially supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. 47 (a) is set as the initial position. Further, although the operation device 300 is shown in FIG. 17A, since the appearance is the same, the operation device 300 will be regarded as the operation device 4300 for description. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), similarly to the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, since the lock member 4336 comes into contact with the lever member 4340 from below behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the strength of the lock member 4336 resists an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Can be done.

The rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 4336 behind the lock shaft 4331d3 to prevent the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forced release state (see FIG. 45B). can do. As a result, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts forward (leftward in FIG. 47 (a)), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, if the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4336, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged. it can.

FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 48 shows a state in which the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is in the locked forced release state from the state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47 (a)), the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 The lever member 4340 swings in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48).

As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation device 4300, but the swing speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 and does not change each time, so that the degree of freedom of production is reduced. There was a problem of

The operation speed can be diversified by variously changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 when it comes into contact with the lever member 4340 and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, there is a problem that the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) at the timing of swinging the lock member 4336 toward the locked forced release state. It is preferable to detect with.

Here, the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in the direction of tilting the lever member 4340 forward along the straight line L1. As a result, for example, by vibrating the vibrating device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swinging in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is rearward (FIG. 49) from the state of FIG. 49 (a). The state in which the pushing operation is performed toward 49 (a) to the right) is shown, and the cross-sectional view of the swinging operation member 310 is omitted.

In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the locked forced release state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of grasping the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state of FIG. 49A, the lock member 4336 does not regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. When the person releases the hand, the swinging operation member 310 returns to the upward position by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1.

50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a) and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 50A, FIG. 50B, FIG. 51A and FIG. 51B, a state in which the lever member 4340 swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is shown in chronological order. To.

FIG. 50 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

Further, in FIG. 51 (a), the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50 (b), the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the swing is restricted. Illustrated, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51 (a) to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50 (a)).

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, the swinging operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position) by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333.

The lock member 4336 is put into a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in the direction of tilting backward (see FIG. 50 (b)). On the other hand, since the lock member 4336 is always urged by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) in the direction of tilting forward, when the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 4336, the urging force under the lever member 4340. Enter the side (see FIG. 51 (a)). In this way, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

Therefore, even if the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the lock member 4336 regulates the swing of the lever member 4340 by arranging the swing operation member 310 in the downward position. You can do it with certainty.

In an arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51 (a)), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 comes into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51 (a)), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated in the reverse direction and returned, but is continuously rotated in the same direction to obtain the eccentric cam. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection device that detects the timing at which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated in the reverse direction, and it is possible to easily control the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333.

FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 4300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state of FIG. 50A are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 52, by reciprocating the eccentric cam member 4333 around the center of the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung around the center of the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a fanning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

At this time, by reciprocating the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 in a state of being arranged on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. You can keep the distance long. As a result, the driving force required to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

Further, by setting the lock member 4336 to the lock forced release state, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being applied a load from the lock member 4336 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. It is possible to suppress the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43).

FIG. 53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340, and FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are lever members in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). It is a side view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. Note that FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 swings in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

As shown in FIG. 53A, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are attracted by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung.

On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the conduction of the current is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53 (c)).

54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operating device 4300 viewed in cross section along the VIb-VIb line of FIG. Although the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 in the first embodiment are shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment has the same appearance as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. The description will be given assuming that the 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

Here, in the operation device 4300, the extension length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the swing operation member 310 projects to the front side by a distance X41 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54 (b).

In this case, the width dimension of the pachinko machine 4010 in the front-rear direction is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54 (b). Therefore, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. 54 (b). The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the condition. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off in a state where the lock member 4336 regulates the swing, the swing operation member 310 even if an external force is applied to the swing operation member 310. There is a problem that the 310 cannot be arranged in the upward position and the pachinko machine 4010 cannot be put in the packing box.

Further, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position in the inspection line of the factory or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously arranged in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in this state.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 regardless of whether the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336. The swing operation member 310 can be arranged in an upward position.

As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is sent to the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

Next, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the fourth embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described, but in the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are a single drive motor 335a. It is driven synchronously with. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 according to the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the illustration of the right cover member is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 is a cylindrical unlocking shaft arranged with the eccentric cam member 5333 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 and the drive gear 335b behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. It mainly includes a 5331d5, an unlocking cam member 5339 pivotally supported by the unlocking shaft 5331d5, and a locking member 5336 pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3.

56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. 56 (c) is a bottom view. , FIG. 56A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 in the LVIc direction view.

As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D-shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially arranged.

The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D-shape in front view, has a linear shape and extends to the maximum diameter end of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid body portion 5333c1 having high rigidity as compared with the rigid body portion 5333c1. It is mainly provided with a cushioning portion 5333c2 which is low in diameter and cushions the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to be substantially three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch formed with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously operated by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is operated. Since it is not possible to swing the eccentric cam member 5333, there is a problem that it is necessary to match the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 in advance.

In the present embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is arranged in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined by using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

When the umbrella portion 5333f is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (below FIG. 56B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, if the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in the posture in which the notch 5333f1 faces the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in the correct posture.

57 (a) is a front view of the unlock cam member 5339, FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlock cam member 5339 in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and FIG. 57 (c). ) Is a side view of the unlocked cam member 5339 in the LVIIc direction view of FIG. 57 (a).

As shown in FIG. 57, the unlock cam member 5339 is formed to have the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. 5339a, a shaft hole 5339b formed in the center of the main body 5339a, and a shaft hole 5339b through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and a side surface of the main body 5339a on the front side toward the outside in the radial direction. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length that allows contact with the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a. Mainly prepare.

The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch formed so as to be able to pull out the drive gear 355b in the axial direction when the drive gear 355b is arranged to face the drive gear 355b, and is a notch with respect to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. It is a mark for matching the initial phase of the unlock cam member 5339.

When the umbrella portion 5339d is arranged on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (below FIG. 57B), the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the unlocking cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5, if the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b, the unlocking cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

That is, since the unlock cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5 only in the posture in which the notch 5339d1 faces the drive gear 335b, the lock release cam member 5339 can be assembled in the correct posture.

58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is composed of a member formed in the shape of a long plate, and the transmission member 4336b formed in the shape of a fan-shaped cross section (FIG. 44). See) is not required.

The lock member 5336 is bored in the main body member 5336a formed in the shape of a long plate and in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Mainly, the shaft support hole 5336b to be formed and the locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface of the main body member 5336a facing the unlock cam member 5339 (left side in FIG. 58 (a)). Prepare for.

The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm is locked to the connecting side wall 331c. The other arm of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c of.

The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the trajectory of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in the lock standby state. Mainly provided is a convex portion 5336a2 which is projected along a circle centered on the shaft support hole 5336b on the side close to the lever member 4340 from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1.

The convex portion 5336a2 is inclined upward so that the lower end surface toward the tip end surface. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) on the convex portion 5336a2. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333.

59 (a) and 59 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 59 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged as the player operates the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts to move from the initial position, even if the player swings the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric. It is possible to prevent the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 from colliding with each other.

This is an unavoidable problem when the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (for example, in the case of the first embodiment) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. This is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position as in the embodiment.

Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333 when the lock member 5336 releases the swing restriction (see FIG. 59 (b)) is mechanical. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can surely bring the lever member 4340 into contact with a specific position (position on the minor axis side, position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c) of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is a lever. Take the posture closest to the member 4340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam portion 5333c from being damaged due to the lever member 4340 colliding with the cam portion 5333c.

Further, since the cam portion 5333c is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the regulation of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The maximum angle (movement amount) can be secured. That is, in the present embodiment, in the mode in which the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 operate in synchronization with each other, the swing angle of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released ( This is a synchronization mode in which the maximum amount of movement is secured. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) when the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is produced. Can be improved.

60 (a) and 60 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 60 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. The state of sliding with the portion 5336a1 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid body portion 5333c1.

Here, when the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam is hit from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the operating member in the rotational direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 hit each other, it is better to swing the operating member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction) to increase the swing speed of the operating member. Since it can be made large, the effect of production can be improved.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision, and the lever member 4340 swings. The speed of operation can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down.

Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven independently, the lock member 4336 is set to the lock forced release state (see FIG. 48) in the state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down, and the lock member 4336 is operated by the player or the eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward due to being pushed up by 4333 and the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is put into the lock standby state, so that the lever member 4340 The swing can be regulated.

As a result, resistance is suppressed from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state where the lever member 4340 is reciprocated up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first drive device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are controlled synchronously, the posture of the member for driving the lock member 5336 (the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it may be difficult to immediately arrange the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state, especially when the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position by being operated by the player.

For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is arranged on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 half a turn before the release portion 5339c starts pushing the lock member 5336. Therefore, it becomes difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the operation of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the states shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction of tilting forward by being operated by the player, and whenever the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the downward position, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. , The swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated (see FIG. 62).

However, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 when it reciprocates and swings due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. It may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed on the lock member 5336 releases the lock member 5336 from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the lever member 4340 can suppress the resistance given by the lock member 5336.

Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed toward the unlocked state side. (Fig. 60 (a) clockwise), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the urging direction, and the lever member 4340 enters the lock standby state. Rocking is regulated.

Therefore, the swing direction of the lever member 4340 can be regulated at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung.

The unlock cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the lock member 5336 only when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)), and otherwise the driving force is different from that of the lock member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, the lock member 5336 operates in conjunction with each other, and it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the lever member 4340.

As shown in FIG. 60A, the lever member 4340 is in a posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position until the lock member 5336 is arranged in the lock standby position (posture in FIG. 59B). To maintain.

Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are controlled synchronously, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). The eccentric cam member 5333 may swing the lever member 4340. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the tubular portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is formed at a predetermined angle (from the posture of FIG. Even if it rotates (up to the posture of 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 is only filled, and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed from swinging. As a result, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60 (b), and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 is rotated to the arrangement where the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 abuts on the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. To.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336.

Until the rear end of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the curved wall portion 5336a1 allows the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340, so that the lock member 5336 is attached to the lever member 4340. It has a structure that can suppress the resistance applied from the lever.

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

FIG. 62 is a schematic view of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is pushed down by the player in the direction of tilting forward from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b).

As shown in FIG. 61B, the circumscribed circle C41 of the cam portion 5333c centered on the tubular portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 5333 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) while the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is arranged in the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (in the same direction (clockwise in FIG. 62)). The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59 (a)) by rotating it counterclockwise (FIG. 62).

Even if the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the forward tilting direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the eccentric cam member 5333 is pushed in the same direction from the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) (FIG. 62). The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise), and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to regulate the swing of the lever member 4340. Can be done.

As a result, after the lock member 5336 is released from the lock state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player pushes down the swing operation member 310.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swing width of the lever member 4340 is secured. However, in the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is arranged above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

63 (a) and 63 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336, and FIG. 63 (b) shows that the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63 (a). When the lock member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction on the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 63A, the eccentric cam member 6333 is in a state immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, and the unlock cam member 5339 is in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side. Along with this, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other, so that the lever member 4340 is eccentric cam. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 in the present embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the regulation of the lock member 5336.

Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

64 (a) and 64 (b) show the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336 in chronological order. It is a schematic diagram of the member 5339 and the lock member 5336.

In FIG. 64A, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 63B, and the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member 5339 is arranged above the locking portion 5336c of the locking member 5336, and the locking member 5336. Is shown in the state of returning to the lock standby state. In FIG. 64 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64 (a), and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. The state of contacting the side surface is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is arranged on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 Even if it swings, the swing is dammed by the eccentric camshaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload occurs when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 will not be damaged.

Therefore, by increasing the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is the most). The period of being placed at the lower end) can be shortened. As a result, the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, so that the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

65 (a) and 65 (b) are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the unlock cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. In addition, in FIG. 65A, a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336 is shown. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Will be done.

Further, by further rotating the eccentric cam member 5333 from the state shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. This regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) and the state shown in FIG. 65 (a) (rotating the drive gear 335b by alternately switching the rotation direction). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) arranged at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be reciprocated and swung up and down (fanning operation).

In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64 (b) and 65 (a), the unlock cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the lock member 5336 (the unlock portion 5339c of the unlock cam member is separated from the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the application of resistance from the lock member 5336 to the unlock cam member 5339, and to stabilize the rotational state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the convex portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in the direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves upward from the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be regulated by the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63 (a)).

Further, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 for a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the convex portion 5336a2, so that the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45) is applied. Can be secured to a large extent, and the speed at which the lock member 5336 enters below the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) can be secured to a large extent. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be reliably regulated by the lock member 5336.

In the state shown in FIG. 65A, consider a case where a load is applied by the player in the direction of lifting the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 from the lever member 4340, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are operated in synchronization with each other. Therefore, when the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted from the lever member 4340. The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted and the rear end is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the unlock cam is rotated clockwise with the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, since there is no possibility that the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 6333 from being damaged by the load applied from the lever member 4340.

In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the unlock cam member 5339 are at different positions in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). It is placed at a position that does not interfere in the direction parallel to the paper surface. Therefore, from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocked portion 5339c of the unlocked cam member 5339 interfere with each other even if they rotate in the proximity direction in FIG. 65 (a). Since they pass each other, it is possible to prevent damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlock cam member 5339.

Next, the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly gives resistance to the lever member 340 has been described, but the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to the case where the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. The case where resistance is given to the lever member 7340 from the gear damper 7347 will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which the release member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340, and FIG. 66 (b) shows that the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is separated from the lever member 7340. The state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

As shown in FIG. 66 (a), the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 arranged inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centered on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are attracted and fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change, so that the lever The member 7340 is not subject to the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), when the release member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and is peeled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player necks). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 acts on the lever member 7340 only when the player applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) enough to peel off the lever member 7340 from the peeling member 7350. can do. As a result, it is possible to change the operation feeling when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and encourage the player to properly use the swing operation member 310.

For example, in the state of FIG. 66 (b), the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 becomes excessively large, which makes the operation difficult for the player and causes stress. When the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the suction-fixed state, the operation resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350. Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the swing operation member 310. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating device 7300 from being destroyed.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. Further, FIG. 67A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 67A, the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of elongated hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same manner as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to the right cover member (not shown) arranged in pairs with the left cover member 8331.

The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of elongated holes, the inner side surface is composed of a smooth surface, and the first slide hole 8331i1 is arranged on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner side surface is smooth. It is mainly provided with a second slide hole 8331i2 which is composed of the above and is arranged on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole through which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-shaped slide plate 8370 arranged so as to slide and move along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is provided with a shaft portion 8336f which is a cylindrical portion inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and penetrates the slide plate 8370, and is pivotally supported by the slide plate 8370 via the shaft portion 8336f.

The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 which is a part in the axial direction and is inserted into the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a manner of being separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance (see FIG. 67A) in a state of being arranged to face each other. , Mainly provided with a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b that face a surface contact with a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state of facing each other (see FIG. 68 (a)), and each side surface is slightly provided. It is composed of a curved rhombus.

As shown in FIG. 67A, the first side surface 8336f1a is formed from a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the release side. The radius. Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (with the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

In the state where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not come into contact with the second slide hole 8331i2 and a predetermined distance is left, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370.

Note that FIG. 67B shows a state in which the lock member 8336 is rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side. Even in this state, a slight gap is provided between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 rotates slightly from the position on the release side, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase, so that the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It is possible to suppress impairing the feeling of operation during dynamic operation.

On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the position on the release side to the position on the fixed amount side, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be easily arranged on the fixed side at a desired position.

The slide plate 8370 includes a convex portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and is projected in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is arranged to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 arranged on the slide plate 8370 so that the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel to each other, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Mainly prepare.

The convex portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the convex portion 8371 from being caught in the locking recess 8331i2.

The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is adhered to the peeling member 350. The slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i as the lever member 340 swings while the magnet member 8372 is adhered to the peeling member 350.

By driving the drive gear 8374, the drive motor 8373 makes it possible to arrange the lock member 8336 at a position on the release side (see FIG. 67 (a)) and a position on the fixed side (see FIG. 68 (a)). It is a driving means. Since the drive motor 8373 is arranged on the slide plate 8370, it slides and moves together with the slide plate 8370.

The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface, and the magnetic sensor MC1 either attracts the magnet portion 8372 to the peeling member 350 or separates the peeling member 350 from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not it is. Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is located at the end of the swing range. Further, in the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is arranged at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

Therefore, when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped and the lever member 340 repeatedly switches between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the player swings the swing operation member 310. It is possible to detect that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main control device). In this case, the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly collides with the eccentric cam member 333, which may damage the eccentric cam member 333.

In the embodiment in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in the stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member is in the process of swinging. It was difficult to fix the 340 with the lock member 336.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, the lock member 8336 stops the swing of the lever member 340 even during the swing operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is operated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can be done. This will be described below.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operating member 310 is arranged between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350.

As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. As a result, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the release member 350 downward for the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the magnet portion 8372 is used for the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310. The slide plate 8370 locks the release member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a load in the vertical direction is slightly applied.

From the state shown in FIG. 68A, when the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swinging operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68 (b)). As a result, it is possible to prevent the lock member 8336 from being damaged by transmitting a load of a predetermined amount or more applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player to the lock member 8336.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of the moving range (in the middle of the moving range of the lever member 340), so that the player lifts the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from coming into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, since the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (the range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

As a result, the load generated on the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 comes into contact with the release member 350 can be suppressed, so that the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69A, the lever member 340 and the release member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the release member is arranged with the lock member 8336 on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where the 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372 are shown by solid lines, and in FIG. 69 (b), the lock member 8336 is shown from the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 69 (a). The state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides and moves together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the release member 350 (decelerated due to frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i) and is released. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated from each other (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69A).

In this case, when the lock member 8336 is arranged on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the release member 350 hits the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the contact.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, the locking member 8336 is immediately controlled to be arranged on the fixed side (see FIG. 69B), thereby peeling. The upper side surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower side surface of the member 350.

As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the release member 350 abuts on the lock member 8336 before the release member 350 abuts on the eccentric cam member 333, thereby moving downward. Since the movement is stopped, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. It should be noted that this effect is exhibited only when the lock member 8336 is configured to slide and move together with the release member 350 as in the present embodiment.

That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lock member 336 is fixed on the fixed side depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B). Even if it is arranged in, there is a possibility that the upper side surface of the eccentric cam member 333 protrudes toward the release member 350 side rather than the upper side surface of the lock member 336, and if an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state. , The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing damage to the eccentric cam member 333 is not sufficient.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the release member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (a state in which the release member 350 comes into contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). By arranging the lock member 8336 on the fixed side immediately after the release member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the upper side surface of the lock member 8336 is placed on the release member 350 rather than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. As a result, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the release member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the release member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves in such a manner that the maximum diameter portion approaches the release member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the release member 350. Because.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are entirely rigid has been described, but the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is attached to the swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340 from a coil spring. The elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 to be formed are provided. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are side views of the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is downward in the state shown in FIG. 70 (a). A state in which the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-shaped elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 arranged in pairs up and down near the swing operation member 310.

When the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are maintained in a state of being contracted to substantially the same length. The elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered in order to maintain the state shown in FIG. 70 (a) (both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swinging operation member 310. It is set higher than the elastic modulus of the elastic connecting member CS91 on the side, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

When the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70B, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 change their elastic states (upper elastic connecting member). (Because the length of CS91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92), the relative positional relationship between the swinging operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken, and the swinging operation member 310 is loaded. It is possible to prevent the load from being directly transmitted to the rear portion of the lever member 340 (peeling member 350, etc., see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inner member of the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) from being damaged by the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, 5333 are arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, 4340 has been described, but the tenth embodiment has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a) and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment on the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, it is substituted. The same applies to FIGS. 73 and 74.

Further, in FIG. 71 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position is shown, and in FIG. 71 (b), the eccentric cam member 2333 is shown in FIG. 71 (a) from the state of FIG. 71 (a). ) Is shown in a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101, and in FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). The state in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated by a large angle θ102 is shown, and FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in an upward position.

As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 pivotally supports an eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. An eccentric cam shaft 10331i is provided, and a drive gear 10335 that is rotationally driven by a drive motor is arranged at a position separated from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the torsion spring-like torsion spring SP101 formed of the elastic material generates an urging force that urges the lever member 340 in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly urged so as to be pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated by following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 to push down the rear end of the lever member 340. Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, it is possible to prevent the cam member 2333b from being damaged due to the sliding of the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 The load from the cam member 2333 acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the portion P101 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the lever member 340 is the eccentric cam member 2333. It is set to a position deviated from the rib portion 2333b4 of the above by a predetermined angle (a position deviated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

As a result, even if a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, the load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is applied to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind and above the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

In the state of FIG. 71 (a), a columnar member is arranged under the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 cannot swing any more (the posture of FIG. 71 (a) is It is considered to be the terminal position).

When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the swing operation member 310 swings upward. Further, when the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 71 (b), the swing operating member 310 swings downward. By repeating the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and the counterclockwise rotation in this way, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (fanning operation). As a result, it is possible to notify the player of an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state. In addition, the operation device 10300 can be visually recognized by the player as an effect device.

When the swinging operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is arranged behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front), whereby the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 even when the lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 in the circumferential direction are the same. This is because can be increased. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side, and the release member 350 is restricted from moving by the lock member 336. Therefore, when a small load such as a player placing a hand on the swing operation member 310 is applied, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging.

73 (a), 73 (b) and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 10300 in line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73A, the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position, the lock member 336 is arranged in the fixed side position, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state in which the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 from the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Illustrated in.

In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is arranged on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340. .. As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the tubular portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is applied. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

When the player applies a load in the pushing-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so that the reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 increases). As a result, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310. Because it is necessary to do (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and swing the lever member. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (fanned).

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the anxiety felt by the player due to the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after pushing down the swing operation member 310, a reaction force can be returned to the hand of the player holding the swing operation member 310, giving the player a feeling of operation. Can be granted.

On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocates and swings at high speed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character "weak" can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

That is, in the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocally swung up and down with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, which causes the player to perform an operation reaction force. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, it has the effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, it has the effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. It should be noted that this state can be switched depending on the magnitude of the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can be promoted to perform a predetermined operation or perform a predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 310 are structurally not related to each other has been described, but the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment has the swinging operation member 11310. The resistance when swinging is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 according to the eleventh embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 75 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 75 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 75 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibrating device 11366, and a through hole is formed in the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole is formed through the vibrating device 11366 and penetrating from the vibrating member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363. The interval between the openings of the bobbin member 11366a is shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support rod 363.

The vibrating member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g which is inserted into a through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-shaped portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed in the shape of a pair of leaf springs. ..

The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the torsion spring in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75 (b)). It is arranged at a position where the SP2 is sandwiched. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and in the state of FIG. 75 (b), the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support rod 363 together with the torsion spring SP2, so that the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centered on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 75 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can press the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 11366.

As a result, the same vibrating device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swinging operation of the swinging operation member 11310 increases due to the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described, but the operating device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment has the pushing operation of the lens member 317. The regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the swinging member 360 at the angle regulating hole 361d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) and 76 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 according to the twelfth embodiment in the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but since the appearance shape is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is substituted. Further, FIG. 76 (a) shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a pushing operation of the lens member 317 from the state of FIG. 76 (a). The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

The opening of the center of the bottom portion 312a of the intermediate frame member 12312 is enlarged with respect to the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

The vibrating member 12314 includes a rod-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g in which an enlarged portion of the central opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 is extended downward along the vibrating device 366 from the main body portion 314a. The pressing rod portion 12314g is extended to a position where the tip can come into contact with the regulation rod 365.

The pressing rod portion 12314g is arranged at a position in contact with the regulating rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76 (a)), and the restricting rod is in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76 (b)). It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod is rotated. 365 is pressed against the end of the angle control hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support rod 365 can be fixed to the angle regulation hole 361d, it is possible to suppress the swinging operation of the swing operation member 12310 centering on the shaft support rod 363. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for the vibration centered on the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation unit, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 is transmitted to the player (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the vibration component of 76 (a) in the vertical direction).

Further, while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player is pushing the lens member 317, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is secured, and the player can operate the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In the no-load state where the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibrating device 366.

As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of vibrating the swing operation member 12310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. It can be compatible.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. In the first embodiment described above, the lever member 340 rotates due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 during the rotation operation. However, in the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 on the opposite side of the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340 while the lever member 340 rotates. It is possible to configure a state of displacement. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 77 shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is arranged in a downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, in the operation device 13300, the swing operation member 13310 is arranged so as to project from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. Note that FIG. 78 shows a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 arranged inside the outer case member 13320.

As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 is formed on the back surface side in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344,345 (see FIG. 11), and the inner case member 13330 is formed on the left and right sides of the cover members 344,345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner of hiding the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are provided with adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a, respectively, which are bored in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion.

The adjustment elongated holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively. Since they are elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 may be formed due to variations in molding or the like. Even if the shapes vary, the positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 with respect to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the positional deviation in the left-right direction that occurs between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjusting elongated holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces facing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction by the fitting recess 13322a recessed in the right direction from the end face of the right front cover 13322 in contact with the left front cover 13322 and the fitting recess 13322a. In a state where the wall member 13322b to be mounted in the embodiment is provided and the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the movement to the left is stopped by the end surface of the left front cover 13321 to prevent the wall. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

With such a configuration, when the wall member 13322b is replaced, the wall member 13322b can be replaced only by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b is damaged due to the load from the posture correction device 13312). It is an easy place). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the operating device 13300. In FIG. 79, the illustration of the outer case member 13320 is omitted, and the state in which the inner case member 13330 is disassembled is shown.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally support a lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lock shaft 4331d3 on which the lock member 5336 is pivotally supported, and the lock shaft 4331d3 arranged above the lock shaft 4331d3 are formed to have a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 and the lock release cam member 5339 is pivotally supported. The lock release shaft 13331d5 is mainly provided.

A bent sheet metal member B13 is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331 at the tip of the unlocking shaft 13331d5. As a result, the unlock cam member 5339 is maintained so as not to be pulled out from the unlock shaft 13331d5.

Since the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is formed shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is located in the portion where the unlocking shaft 13331d5 is not arranged (the portion on the right side of the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5). By rotating the lock release shaft 13331d5, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332, which are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 13340 is arranged inside, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. , The first drive device 335, the lock member 5336, the gear damper 338, and the unlock cam member 5339 are mainly provided.

FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. In FIG. 80, a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310 is shown, and a state in which the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detecting member 343 that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

The back side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the outer shell protrudes to the back side, and the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape (FIG. 17 (b). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swing member 360 is partially inserted.

As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is coaxial with the main body member 13341 formed from a metal material such as iron and formed in the shape of a long rod having a U-shaped cross section, the gear damper receiving member 342, and the gear damper receiving member 342. The posture detection member 343, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, the angle control rod member 346, and the swing member 360 arranged at the front end of the main body member 341. Mainly prepare.

FIG. 81 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 13340.

The main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 is regulated by a main body portion 13341a formed in a long rod shape having a U-shaped cross section and a pair of shaft holes 341b formed in the substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a in the left-right direction. The hole 341c, the pair of swing member support portions 341d, the shaft hole 341e, the regulation hole 341f, and the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. Mainly includes a contact member 13341 g to be contacted.

The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface and is in contact with the lock member 5336 at the back surface side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 is a disk plate-shaped intermediate base M13 that is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a back side frame member that is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correction device 13312 which is arranged inside the back side frame member 13311 and has a portion protruding from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion sandwiched between the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13. The front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, which are fixed to each other by sandwiching the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 from the front-rear direction, and a pair of covers at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. It mainly includes a separation prevention cover 13315, a protective cover 13316 fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82), and a lens member 13317 elastically connected between the intermediate base M13.

The posture correction device 13312 has a support member 13312b disposed between the contact member 13312a protruding outward from the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311 and the contact member 13312a via a coil spring SP13. A hook member 13312c having a hook-shaped portion that projects inward from the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311 and fits with the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

The contact member 13312a includes a straight rod-shaped overhanging portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 protruding from the overhanging portion 13312a1 in a flange shape in the left-right direction.

The overhanging portion 13312a1 is a portion that overhangs the outside of the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 abuts on the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the contact member 13312 is further extended. It is a part that prevents overhanging.

The front cover 13313 is provided with a recessed locking recess 13313a that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the back cover 13314 (in the back of FIG. 82).

The separation prevention cover 13315 is recessed in the same shape as the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 so that the protective cover 13316 can be received in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). A rod to be drilled and inserted into the inside is mainly provided with a retaining hole 13315b configured to be internally fitted into the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 83 shows the assembly method of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in chronological order, and FIG. 83A is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314 and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is the front cover 13313 and the back surface of the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315 and the protective cover 13316.

As shown in FIG. 83, in FIG. 83 (a), a state in which the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are fixed is illustrated, and in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. 83 (a). Is added, and FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover 13316 is added to the state of FIG. 83 (b) and is fixed to the back side frame member 13311.

As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing the wall portions arranged to face each other with the fastening screw N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the separation prevention cover 13315 is attached so as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covering in the vertical direction in FIG. 83 (b)), and the fastening screw is inserted into the locking recess 13313a. By screwing N13b into the retaining hole 13315b, the separation prevention cover 13315 is fixed so as not to be removable.

As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a in a manner of covering the fastening screw N13b (fitted sideways (to the right of FIG. 83C) in a non-pullable manner), and then. By fastening and fixing the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) to the back side frame member 13311, the upper side surface of the back side frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, and the operation device 13300 can be partially disassembled to prevent fraudulent passage of wires inside.

That is, the fastening screw N13a must be removed in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, but the path to the fastening screw N13a is blocked by the separation prevention cover 133315.

Further, where the fastening screw N13b must be removed in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the route to the fastening screw N13b is blocked by the protective cover 13316, and the protective cover 13316 thereof. Is abutted against the back side frame member 13311 in the pull-out direction in the assembled state, so that it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

Therefore, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, but in the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are on the back side of the back side frame member 13311. Since the 13322s are arranged close to each other (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side to the front side is narrowed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and it is possible to prevent fraud.

Next, the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84 (b) is a directional view of the arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a) (direction view from a direction perpendicular to the plane of the guide bottom wall 13311d). It is a top view of the back side frame member 13311 in FIG. 84 (c), and FIG. 84 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXXIVc-LXXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b).

As shown in FIG. 84, the back side frame member 13311 has an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 84C) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-shaped extension wall 13311c extending laterally from the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back side frame member 13311, and a bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b. A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inside the back side frame member 13311 along the line, and a hook insertion hole 13311e formed in the vertical direction at the opposite end of the guide hole 13311b of the guide bottom wall 13311d. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extension wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the hook insertion hole 13311e is inclined so that the side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d side moves away from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. Due to this inclination, the contact area of the hook member 13312c described later with the inclined contact portion 13312c3 can be secured, and the guide bottom wall 13311d can be prevented from being damaged (cracked) by the load applied from the hook member 13312c.

The support member guide wall 13311f is formed so that the upper end surface (front side surface in FIG. 84A) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

Next, the hook member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. 85. The hook member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the hook member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85 (c) is a front view of the hook member 13312c in view, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the hook member 13312c in the direction of arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (d) is a side view of FIG. 85 (b). It is sectional drawing of the hook member 13312c in the line LXXXXVd-LXXXVd.

As shown in FIG. 85, the hook member 13312c is a member having a symmetrical shape, and extends from the upper end portion of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 13312c1 and the main body portion 13312c1 along the vertical direction to the front side. Formed as a hook portion 13312c2 to be provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall protruding outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 13312c4 to be formed, and a recessed portion 13312c5 recessed in a manner in which a part of the main body portion 13312c1 is cut in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

The inclination angle of the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the inclined contact portion 13312c3 is set to an inclination angle equivalent to the inclination angle of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the back side frame member 13311.

Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The support member 13312b is a member made of a hard resin and formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the longitudinal direction in a top view. FIG. 86A is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b, and FIG. (B) is a top view of the support member 13312b in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb of FIG. 86 (a), and FIG. 86 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b in the line LXXXVIc-LXXXXVIc of FIG. 86 (b). is there.

As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a main body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section and a pair of plate-shaped contact plates 13312b2 connecting both side surfaces of the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1. Mainly includes a locking convex portion 13312b3 that is projected from the end of the main body portion 13312b1 in the thickness direction, and a peep hole 13312b4 that is bored in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body portion 13312b1.

As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are arranged in the region surrounded by the main body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

When the main body portion 13312b1 is assembled so as to cover the coil spring SP13, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the peephole 13312b4. Therefore, the coil spring SP13 may be forgotten to be inserted during assembly, or the position of the coil spring SP13 with respect to the support member 13312b may shift. Can be prevented.

Next, a method of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. In addition, in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the state of assembling the posture correction device 13312 to the back side frame member 13311 is shown in time series.

87 (a) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 in the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 87 (d) is the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device in the line LXXXVIId-LXXXXVIId of FIG. 87 (c). It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

88 (a), 88 (c) and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312, and FIG. 88 (b) is a partial top view of FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of 13312, and FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e).

The method of assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correction device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correction device 13312 is moved to the back side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) along the guide bottom wall 13311d, and FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, the hook member 13312c is assembled to the left side of the support member 13312b, but since it is retrofitted, the space of the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (the support member 13312b in FIG. 87 (d)). The space on the left side) can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), in the contact member 13312a, the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (dammed) to the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311, and the back side frame member 13311 It is arranged inside the.

In the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being contracted more than its natural length. That is, a load directed to the right is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the hook member 13312c is placed on the back side of the hook portion insertion hole 13311e of the back side frame member 13311. It is inserted from the outside of the frame member 13311 (below FIG. 88 (b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the hook member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, the appearance when the hook member is forgotten to be assembled or the hook member is damaged and falls off. You can notice those defects by inspection.

As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the hook member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 13312c4 of the hook member 13312c abuts on the lower side surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and in that state, the hook member 13312b is hung on the support member 13312b. When the applied load is removed, the support member 13312b is moved to the left in FIG. 88 (f) to the position where the support member 13312b abuts on the hook member 13312c due to the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 (the movement of the support member 13312b to the left is due to the hook member 13312c. (Prevented), the locking convex portion 13312b3 is covered from above by the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c, so that the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted.

That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13.

In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the hook member 13312c is assembled from the inside of the back side frame member 13311 to the back side frame member 13311, the hook member 13312c is on the back side in the same manner as the hook portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. When the hook-shaped portion that prevents the frame member 13311 from moving upward is arranged on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2 and the size of the hook-shaped portion. Will also need to be moved.

In this case, it becomes difficult to select the coil spring SP13, which may interfere with the function of the posture correction device 13312. That is, when the holding force of the posture correction device 13312 is emphasized, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If it becomes necessary to move the support member 13312b extra (for example, it is necessary to move it twice the distance) during assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases (for example, doubles) by that amount, and the force is weak. It is difficult for workers to assemble.

On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state regardless of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when assembling the hook member 13312c. Depends on displacement. Therefore, if the distance for moving the support member 13312b is reduced, it can be assembled with a smaller force and a large holding force can be secured. In the present embodiment, since the hook member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

When removing the posture correction device 13312, the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged by moving the front side end portion (left end portion in FIG. 88F) of the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts. The stopper is released, and the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately removed from the back side frame member 13311.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the tip of the main body portion 13312b1 is arranged inside (surface position) from the outer surface of the back side frame member 13311, so that the back side frame member 13311 It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311 and fraudulently pulling out the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c.

In order to prevent the support member 13312b from wobbling, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 of the hook member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are brought into close contact with each other in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)). I need to let you. Therefore, it is necessary to strictly control the dimensional relationship, but due to variations in the molding of the support member 13312b and the hook member 13312c, the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c2 may go to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 just by fitting normally. There is a possibility that there is no such case (the back surface of the hook portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side in FIG. 88F) and the locking convex portion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member stops in the middle).

In the present embodiment, the hook member 13312c is deformed by a relatively small force by concentrating and pushing the force into the recessed portion 13312c5 arranged on the hook member 13312c, and the lower surface of the hook portion 13312c1 is locked by the convex portion. It can be pushed inward of the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

Further, even if the hook member 13312c is damaged or the hook member 13312c is forgotten to be attached, the support member 13312b moves until it is pressed against the wall portion on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which the wire is inserted through the hook insertion hole 13311e.

Next, the function of the posture correction device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 89A shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 89B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. ..

As shown in FIG. 89A, the vibrating device 366 is displaced in the direction Y13a in which the lens member 13317 moves when the swing operating member 13310 is arranged in the upward position (in a linear direction passing through the shaft support rod 363). The case where the player sets the operation direction U13a for pushing the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction) will be described. The smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation (the wrist can be pushed in without returning).

By rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) from the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

Here, as shown in FIG. 89B, when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The lever member 13340 is rotated by the angle θ13x formed by the straight line X13a parallel to the above and the straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes the angle θ13x when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the downward position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the tip of the overhanging portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation is performed on the lever member 13340. The member 13310 is rotated clockwise by an angle θ13y in FIG. 89 (a). The angle θ13y is set to an angle similar to the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swing member 360 can rotate.

When the swing operation member 13310 swings and rotates with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is an angle θ13y). Therefore, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is brought closer to the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Since this can be done, it is possible to avoid a change in the operation feeling and a situation in which it becomes difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317.

In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

Further, since the swing operation member 13310 is configured to change its posture at the timing when it is arranged in the downward position, it is compared with the case where the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Therefore, it is possible to easily indicate to the player the timing of pressing the lens member 317. That is, for example, by displaying "press" or the like on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol The display of the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the present embodiment, the posture correction device 13312 has a function of applying a load for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 to the lever member 13340, and the force applied from the posture correction device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 is the lever member. It occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89 (b), a load for rotating the swing operation member 13310 clockwise (b) occurs). Therefore, the force generated by the posture correction device 13312 for changing the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from rotating too much and the rear end portion (right end portion in FIG. 89B) of the lever member 13340 from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

The wall member 13322b with which the posture correction device 13312 abuts can also abut with the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 intends to over-rotate counterclockwise (further rotate from the state shown in FIG. 89B). It is placed in a suitable position. As a result, even when the player applies an overload to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

Here, it is also possible to connect gears from the rotation shaft of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340, and rotate the swing operation member 13310 by the mesh rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact member 13312a projecting from the swing operation member 13310 changes the posture of the swing operation member 13310 by contacting the wall member 13322b, so that the swing operation member 13310 is arranged on the lever member 13340. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the weight of the lever member 13340 can be reduced, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, the elastic force (displacement in the torsional direction) of the torsion spring SP2 that urges the swing operation member 13310 is compared with the state in which the torsion spring SP2 is arranged in the upward position. , The state where it is placed in the downward position is larger. Further, in the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correction device 13312 toward the swing operation member 13310 in a manner in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated in the direction opposite to the urging direction of the torsion spring SP2.

Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is such that the swing operation member 13310 is in the downward position as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position. The state of being placed in is larger. Therefore, there are two states: a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has a small (light) operation feeling with respect to the lever member 13340 (upward position) and a state in which the rotation resistance is large (heavy) in operation (downward position). Can be formed.

For example, when the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is hit when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at the upward position, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is affected by the hit reaction. While it is possible to produce an effect of wobbling with respect to the lever member 13340, when the operation of hitting the lens member 13317 when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is performed. By increasing the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340, the swinging operation member 13310 can be solidified with respect to the lever member 13340, and for example, it is possible to suppress failure to hit the lens member 13317 when it is continuously hit. ..

The change in the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by a change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action is not changed by the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 13300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 90A and FIG. 90B, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 90A, the contact member 13312a comes into contact with the wall member 13322b. In FIG. 90B, a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correction device 13312 is contracted while the state of being rotated in the rearward direction is shown. , The state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward is shown.

As shown in FIG. 90 (b), even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correction device 13312 is configured to be able to contract, so that when the lens member 13317 is overloaded. The posture of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed, and the wall member 13322b can be prevented from being damaged (penetrated and destroyed).

Further, when the tip of the contact member 13312a is pressed against the wall member 13322b to rotate the swing operation member 13310, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 is affected by the displacement. Since it increases proportionally, it is possible to prevent the swinging operation member 13310 from rotating excessively.

In the present embodiment, since the shaft support rod 363, which is the rotation axis of the swing operation member 13310, is arranged on the directions Y13a and Y13b for pushing the lens member 13317, the swing operation member is subjected to the load of pushing the lens member 13317. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force for rotating the 13310.

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 is always arranged in the downward position causes the swing operation member 13310 to change its posture. However, the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment swings. It is possible to switch between the case where the swinging operation member 14310 changes its posture and the case where the posture does not change when the operating member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

91 (a) is a front view of the lock member 14336 in the 14th embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a side view of the lock member 14336 in the direction of the arrow LXXXXIb of FIG. 91 (a).

As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a rod shape that is long in the vertical direction, and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a convex portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. It mainly includes a locking member 14336c which is configured to be movable in the sinking direction.

The locking member 14336c is a member that is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and an urging spring SP14a is arranged between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a, and is in contact with the unlocking cam member 5339 when traveling. It is placed in a position where it can be touched. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 formed by chamfering on the upper side surface.

Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) comes into contact with the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward of the main body member 14336a along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. 92A). (Immersion) is possible, and the lock member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c when the contact is made from the front side (for example, from the left side in FIG. 91B). ..

The eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 that abuts and rotates in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

As shown in FIG. 92A, the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a tubular portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having different shapes in the left-right direction (FIG. 92 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface), and an umbrella portion. Mainly includes 5333f.

The cam portion 14333c is a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side in FIG. 92 (a) and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (in the back of the paper surface in FIG. 92 (b)). A convex portion 14333c2, which is projected from an end portion of the 14333c1, is provided.

The convex portion 14333c2 is configured such that the side surface in the circumferential direction is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the convex portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, the force for pushing the convex portion 14337b1 is not only the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (eccentric cam shaft). It can also be generated by the load generated in the distance relationship with 331d2). Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a having a plate shape with an L-shaped cross section, an extension portion 14337b extending from the side of the main body member 14337a in a bifurcated shape, and these main body members 14337a. The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to the shaft support portion 14337c that pivotally supports the main body member 14337a and the extension portion 14337b at the connecting portion with the extension portion 14337b and the end portion of the main body member 14337a. The elastic device 14337d and the like are mainly provided.

The main body member 14337a is configured such that the end on the opposite side of the end pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can project from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92A, the main body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (positional relationship in which the main body member 14337a is touched at a distance of 0) even if it comes into contact with the swing operation member 14310, but cannot apply a load.

The extension portion 14337b is arranged on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 92A) so that it can come into contact with the convex portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. 92 (a) is provided with a convex portion 14337b1 projecting on the front side of the paper surface. Here, the convex portion 14337b1 is arranged on the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93 (b) or FIG. 95 (b)), it is arranged at a position deviating from the movement locus of the convex portion 14333c2.

In the elastic device 14337d, the case is fixed to the inside of the inner case member 14330, and the portion in contact with the main body member 14337a is recessed in a dogleg shape, and the recessed portion can be changed in position while being urged by a coil spring. It is composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is set to rotate, if the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form that converges on the dogleg-shaped recessed portion.

FIG. 92 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlock cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise to rotate the lock member 14336. , The state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the upward position is shown. That is, between FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the swing operation member 14310 is moved by the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, as compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the guide hole drilled for the posture correction device 13312 (see FIG. 80) to project. A back side frame member 14311 formed in such a manner that the 13311b is closed is arranged on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

93 (a) and 93 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 14300 in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. The state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown. When the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 92 (a).

That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92 (a), no load is generated from the attitude switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other, and FIG. 94 (b) shows FIG. 94 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 side from the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 94 (c) shows. , The state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 94B and the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 is released is shown.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 are in a state where the rotation angle of the extension portion 14337b is smaller than that in the case where the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1. The contact with and can be released.

That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extending portion 14337b continues to rotate until the convex portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the convex portion 14337b1 can escape between the convex portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94 (b)), the state shown in FIG. 94 (a). Therefore, the contact between the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extension portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94 (b) (see FIG. 94 (c)). Therefore, the region where the extension portion 14337b becomes a resistance to rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced, and the driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333 can be suppressed.

95 (a), 95 (b), 96 (a) and 96 (b) are the lines corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa lines of FIG. 17 (a) with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300. In FIG. 95A, the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in a downward position, and the convex portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is arranged below the convex portion 14337b1 of the attitude switching device (FIG. FIG. A state equivalent to 92 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 95 (a), and the convex portion 14333c pushes the convex portion 14337b1. The state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end is shown, and in FIG. 96 (a), the state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) is shown. Illustrated, FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung via the attitude switching device 14337 (FIG. 95 (b)). reference). That is, by simply switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state of swinging the swing operation member 14310 in the downward position and the operation state of maintaining the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 can be switched. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the attitude switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the attitude switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are arranged in a positional relationship so as not to come into contact with each other at the same time. Therefore, while the eccentric cam member 14333 can transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members, it is possible to avoid transmitting them at the same time, so that the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is suppressed. Can be done.

Since the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 (the side surface that comes into contact with the convex portion 14337b1) is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the axial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the convex portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. The force that pushes the convex portion 14337b1 at the time of contact is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by the force generated in the radial direction (the load generated by the distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be made to. Therefore, the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333 can be reduced.

When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 96 (b), it returns to the state of FIG. 95 (a). At this time, since the unlock cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the lock member 14336 from above, the locking member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the lock member 14336 is in an immersive state, and the rotation of the unlock cam member 5339 is performed. It is prevented from being hindered.

As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture changes when the swing operation member 14310 is arranged in the downward position. By arranging the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase, the control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be loosened (slightly idle) as compared with the case where a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310. However, it is possible to prevent the appearance from changing).

Here, the time until the eccentric cam member 14333 changes from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 are rotated from the state of FIG. 95 (a). By matching the time until the state changes to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match), the rotation speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 can be adjusted. By switching the rotation direction as it is, the state of FIG. 92 (a) changes to the state of FIG. 92 (b) at the same timing after the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is driven, or the state of FIG. 95 (a). Either change from state to state in FIG. 95 (b) can occur.

For example, it takes longer than the time until the change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b) occurs until the change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Assuming that the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 95 (b) after the operating vibration of the drive motor 335a is felt, it is inevitable that the state shown in FIG. ) Will change to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b), and it is possible to determine what kind of operation the swing operation member 14310 will perform next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, does it cause a change from the state of FIG. 92 (a) to the state of FIG. 92 (b)? It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310.

In the present embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 are meshed with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears. In this case as well, the time from operating one of the drive motors until the swinging operation member 14310 starts swinging with respect to the lever member 13340 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 92A) and the lever. The same effect can be obtained by combining the time until the member 13340 starts to rotate clockwise in FIG. 92 (a).

In addition, even if the time required to start operation is different, the first drive motor, which takes a long time, is rotated first, and the second drive motor, which takes a short time, is rotated later, and then first. By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player still feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this period), the player feels the vibration of the first drive motor, which takes a long time, and the first The operation by the drive motor of 2 can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the interlocking of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337. Note that FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise and the convex portion 14333c2 and the convex portion 14337b1 start to come into contact with each other. FIG. 97 (b) shows FIG. 97 (b). From the state of a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the convex portion 14337b1 is moved to the side closer to the outer periphery of the convex portion 14333c2. FIG. 97 (c) shows FIG. 97. From the state of (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount, and the state in which the convex portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 97, the closer the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 is to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, the more it is inclined from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d. Therefore, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333 The displacement due to the above causes the convex portion 14337b1 to move in the axial direction of the shaft of the eccentric cam member 14333 (the component in the axial direction of the load becomes dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with the case where resistance in the circumferential direction is generated in the eccentric cam member 14333.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), since the load applied from the convex portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a Even when the power is turned off, the load from the convex portion 14337b can be countered. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 cannot be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the contact member 13312a. It is possible to configure a state in which the back side frame member 13311 is pulled out from the outside. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 15312a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame in a line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312, and FIG. 98 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 98 (c).

Note that FIG. 98A shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98B shows a state in which the flange member 15312a2 is pulled out from the overhanging member 13312a1 (in FIG. 98B). The unplugged state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the contact member 15312a is formed with a rod-shaped overhang member 15312a1 having a deformable end portion and a T-shaped cross section, and the overhang member 15312a1. Mainly includes a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the overhanging member 15312a1 by being embedded in the.

The overhanging member 15312a1 is formed of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-shaped main body portion 15312a11 and a pair of deformed portions 15312a12 connected at one end of the main body portion 15312a11 in the lateral direction. Be prepared. The connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 and the deforming portion 15312a12 is provided with a cut so as to be easily deformed, and the deformed portion 15312a12 is the main body portion in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). It fits inside the width of 15312a11 in the lateral direction.

The flange member 15312a2 is based on the distance between the base portion 15312a21 formed so as to fit between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f and the connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 of the overhanging member 15312a1 and the deformed portion 15312a12 from the base portion 15312a21. Also mainly includes a convex portion 15312a22 which is convexly provided with a short width.

With such a configuration, when the convex portion 15312a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the overhanging member 15312a1 is in a locked state (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is in a pulled-out state (see FIG. 98B).

In FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), a state in which the hook member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311 is illustrated. In this state, since the coil spring SP13 is shorter than the natural length, it is possible to generate a load for embedding the flange member 15312a2 in the overhanging member 15312a1 from the coil spring SP13. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 15312a is in the locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and fraudulently pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

FIG. 99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the LXXXXXIXb- of FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correction device 15312 in line LXXXXXXb.

In addition, in FIGS. 99A and 99B, a state in which the hook member 13312c is removed from the back side frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid to the space occupied by the hook member 13312c is shown. ..

In the states shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), since the coil spring SP13 is in a state longer than the natural length, the force for pressing the flange member 15312a2 against the overhanging member 15312a1 is not generated, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state shown in FIG. 98 (b)), the contact member 15312a is brought into the removed state. As a result, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside (right side in FIG. 99B) of the back side frame member 13311.

That is, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced by simply sliding the support member 13312b laterally without separating it from the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back side frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it collides with other members and is easily damaged. A certain overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the force of pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the back side frame member 13311 is reduced by moving the support member 13312b due to the hook member 13312c falling off, so that the hook member When a large load such as the 13312c falling off due to cracking is applied from the support member 13312b to the hook member 13312c, it is possible to prevent the contact member 15312a from being similarly damaged.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the hook member 13312c falls off, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that the replacement can be performed immediately. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the hook member 13312c falls off when the contact member 15312a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times as the number of times the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Thereby, the replacement time of the contact member 15312a can be determined by using the detachment of the hook member 13312c as a mark. Further, in the state where the hook member 13312c has fallen off, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, so that the replacement can be easily performed and the maintenance performance can be improved.

Next, the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that urges the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position, and the neck is changed. The case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, but in addition to this, the operation device 16300 in the 16th embodiment operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

100 (a) to 100 (d) are side views of the operation device 16300 according to the 16th embodiment. In addition, in FIGS. 100A to 100D, an external view of the swing operation member 16310 is shown, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically shown, and other parts are schematically imagined. Illustrated by a line.

100 (a) and 100 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in an upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 faces downward. The state of being arranged at the position is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (c), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated, in FIGS. 100 (b) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the backward rotation side (clockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 100, the swing operation member 16310 hides the fastening portion of the back side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. A protective cover 13316 sandwiched between a separation prevention cover 16315 having an iron ball 16315e that changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 and a back side frame member 13311 arranged below the separation prevention cover 16315 (FIG. 82) and a lens member 13317 are mainly provided.

The separation prevention cover 16315 is provided on the wall surface of the receiving recess 13315a and the retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82), and the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) from the lower end of the disk portion. An extension portion 16315c extending along the extension portion 16315c, a long groove 16315d arranged in a long groove shape on a side surface facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 of the extension portion 16315c, and the inside of the long groove 16315d. 16315e, which is movably arranged, and is mainly provided.

The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e arranged inside by gravity, and in FIG. 100A, the right end portion is from the shaft support rod 363 as compared with the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation side end portion to the backward rotation side end portion is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d in 100 (a) to less than 24 degrees with respect to the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operating member 16310 is arranged in the upward position. The position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 (maintaining the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d) regardless of whether the iron ball 16315e is arranged in the downward position. Can be done). In this embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron and is a ball capable of carrying most of the weight of the swinging operation member 16310. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 changes as the iron ball 16315e moves.

As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the right end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity is the shaft support rod 363. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), in the state where the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is arranged at the left end of the long groove 16315d and the center of gravity. The position is moved away from the shaft support rod 363.

That is, the distance from the shaft support rod 363 to the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

For example, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the center of gravity is farther from the shaft support rod 363 than when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, and the moment around the axis of the swing operation member 16310. (Fig. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position (see FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d)), the swing operation member 16310 is moved forward by the player pushing the lens member 13317. After rotating in the rolling direction (after rotating from the state of FIG. 100 (d) to the state of FIG. 100 (c)), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 returns due to the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 (FIG. 100 (c). ) To the state of FIG. 100 (d)) can be lengthened as compared with the case where the center of gravity of the swinging operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis (so that it returns slowly). Can be).

As a result, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is changed to the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 rotating in the rising direction (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. .. In this case, it takes a long time for the player to hit the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 returns to the state shown in FIG. 100 (d) after the swing operation member 16310 is in the state shown in FIG. 100 (c). Even when the player hits the lens member 13317 again (when hitting repeatedly), the posture of the swinging operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state of FIG. 100 (c), and immediately from the state of FIG. 100 (c). Compared with the case of returning to the state of FIG. 100 (d), the continuous striking operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

Further, referring to the change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 100 (a). Since the direction of rotation is the direction of moving the iron ball 16315e downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (a).

On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100 (c) is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. FIG. 100 (c) The rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating clockwise.

Therefore, depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is arranged in the upward position, the rotational resistance when the swing operation member 16310 is rotated is reduced. Can be reversed.

According to the present embodiment, the rotation resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to the change in the internal condition of the swing operation member 16310), so that the direction is opposite to the movement direction of the swing operation member 16310. The load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in the twisting degree of the torsion spring SP2 has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has the swing member 17360. By rubbing against the wall member 17322b, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and the swinging operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state in which 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown.

In the present embodiment, the swing member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swing member 360 in the first embodiment. The swing member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed in a manner of rubbing against a wall member 17322b, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

Further, instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extension portion 17322b1 extending upward from the upper end portion thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 does not come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 Is formed in contact with the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the is arranged in the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the extension portion 17322b1 has a shaft support rod having a contact surface pressed against the tip end portion of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. It is formed in an arc shape centered on 363. As a result, the contact area between the extending portion 17322b1 and the friction arm portion 17362c can be secured, and a sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Therefore, since the rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 increases due to the dynamic friction force, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 also increases, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Since the change in the operation feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is slowly operated, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 Since the dynamic friction force can be applied in the same manner to the rotation of the head, it is possible to surely cause a change in the operation feeling.

Further, since the dynamic friction force is changed by the pressing force and not by the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362, the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extension portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is slow (for example, when the rotation starts), a sufficient dynamic friction force can be generated.

In the present embodiment, since the extension portion 17322b1 is arranged on the wall member 17322b, if the extension portion 17322b1 is damaged, the members that need to be replaced can be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, the wall member 17322b can be easily replaced, and maintainability can be improved.

Next, the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operating member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described, but the operating device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swing member 18360, so that the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

102 (a) to 102 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 18300 according to the eighteenth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and the torsion spring SP2 is not shown, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81). The state in which (see) is removed is shown. Further, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side with respect to the lever member 18340 is shown.

The operation device 18300 in the present embodiment includes a swing member 18360 which is arranged inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 which pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The swing member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, and a cushioning member 364. , A regulation rod 365 and a vibrating device 366 are mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion arranged around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102 (a)), and in the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is attached to the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends thereof are immovably pinned around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated, sliding friction occurs between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

The lever member 18340 includes a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

The main body member 18341 sandwiches an elongated hole 18341h extending in an inclined direction from the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and an extending direction of the elongated hole 18341h in a side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. It mainly includes a pair of guide wall portions 18341i arranged in parallel in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the elongated hole 18341h extends to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB.

The transmission device 18347 is pivotally supported by a push-in portion 18347a having a convex portion to be inserted into the elongated hole 18341h and having a size that allows sliding movement between the guide wall portions 18341i, and a lower end portion of the push-in portion 18347a. The adjusting portion 18347b and the overhanging portion 18347c protruding from the lower end portion of the pushing portion 18347a along one side surface of the adjusting portion 18347b (along the upper side surface in the present embodiment) are mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102 (a) (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b abuts on the overhanging portion 18347c) by an urging spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position, the elongated hole 18241h and the guide are in a positional relationship in which the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide with each other while the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotating. The wall portion 18341i is arranged.

By extending the overhanging portion 18347c beyond the axial support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction close to the overhanging portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is easy to rotate and a direction in which the adjusting portion 18347b is difficult to rotate with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

From such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position.

That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b with respect to the pushing portion 18347a, and the pushing force is used. Part 18347a does not move along the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (b)). Therefore, the state of the rubber band RB does not change, and the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 does not change.

On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state of FIG. 102 (a), the adjusting portion 18347b is locked to the overhanging portion 18347c in the rotational direction, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed into the pushing portion 18347a. A driving force is used to move the elongated hole 18341h (see FIG. 102 (c)). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms the rubber band RB in the stretching direction, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely attached, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB increases. .. Therefore, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

Therefore, even if the swing operation member 13310 looks the same as the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to switch whether the transmission device 18347 is operated or stopped. As a result, the operation feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

Next, the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 103. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described, but the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment receives the load generated from the posture correction device 13312. It is possible to apply it to the lever member 19340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

103 (a) and 103 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 19300 in the 19th embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). In addition, in FIG. 103 (a) and FIG. 103 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which no force is applied is shown, and in FIG. 103 (b), a state in which a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)) is shown. Illustrated.

The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that the locking convex portion 19345e is convexly provided from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and is added from the lever member 13340. The locking convex portion 19345e is arranged at a position where the swing operating member 13310 is placed on the rotation locus of the rotary lever 19337b in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged at a downward position.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), in the present embodiment, the inner case member 19330 is arranged instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured such that a transmission device 19337 is added to the inside of the inner case member 13330.

The transmission device 19337 is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and formed in an L-shaped cross section, and the rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a)). ) A torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force (counterclockwise) is mainly provided.

When the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining portion 19337b1 that comes into contact with the inner surface of the wall surface on the front side of the left cover member 13331 and its posture maintaining portion 19337b1. When the rotary lever 19337b is bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1 and the rotary lever 19337b is located at the rotating end in the urging direction, the surface and surface position where the tip portion abuts on the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 of the left front cover 13321. A contact portion 19337b2 arranged in the above is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the inner case member 19330 also has an opening, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are formed inside the opening. It is configured so that it can be contacted with.

With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. It will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). (When the swing operation member 13310 moves due to the rotation of the swing operation member 13310), the contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is obtained). In this state, the rotary lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and the load is not transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotary lever 19337b can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. , The contact member 13312a of the posture correction device 13312 rotates the rotary lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the locking convex portion 19345e in the rotational direction, the lever member 19340 rebounds in the rotational direction via the rotary lever 19337b (FIG. 103 (b), an operation of rotating clockwise). ) Can be suppressed.

Therefore, for example, when the player hits the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction of raising the lever member 19340 due to the reaction, and the rear end portion of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. An overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B), but in the present embodiment, the rotary lever 19337b is configured to be able to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340, so that the lock member 5336 is applied. The load to be applied can be reduced.

Further, when the rotary lever 19337b comes into contact with the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 may increase and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. However, in the present embodiment, the lens member 13317 Since the rotary lever 19337b can come into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied to (see FIG. 77), it is usual (for example, when the player is not touching the swing operation member 13310). The rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

As a result, while suppressing the driving force of the lever member 19340, when an overload is applied, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased to make the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 89 (b)). The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

Next, the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the posture correction device 13312 for rotating the swing operation member 13310 in the rising direction operates in a linear motion has been described, but in the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment, the posture correction device 20312 is rotated. It is configured as a dynamic device. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

104 (a) and 104 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 20300 in the 20th embodiment in the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. 105 is a partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 104 (a). It is a rear view of the swinging operation member 20310 in the arrow CV direction view of a).

In addition, in FIG. 104 (a) and FIG. 104 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 20310 is arranged in the downward position is shown, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player moves to the swing operation member 13310. A state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction without a force being applied is shown. In FIG. 104 (b), a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 (b)). b) The state in which the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise) is shown.

The swing operation member 20310 is arranged on the back side frame member 20311 having a cup shape (outer shape similar to the back side frame member 13311) and the back side frame member 20311 arranged on the lower side of the swing member 366. The posture correction device 20312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, the protective cover 13316, and the lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

The back side frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides the opening on the back surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation area hole 20311b that opens an area in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed from the back side to the front side with a width slightly larger than that of the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correction device 20312, and the recessed portion 20311c1 formed so as to support the shaft rod portion 20312a1. From the insertion recess 20311c2 recessed above the recessed portion 20311c1 in a cross-sectional fan shape (the shape becomes wider as it gets deeper from the entrance) and the recessed portion 20311c1 of the insertion recess 20311c2. It mainly includes a locking convex portion 20311c3 that is projected from the inner side surface on the distant side.

The posture correction device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section and a leaf spring-shaped leaf spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a in a manner of penetrating the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

The main body member 20312a includes a shaft rod portion 20312a1 pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 formed in a flat plate shape by arranging the shaft rod portion 20312a1 at an end portion, and a shaft rod portion 20312a1 and a flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 formed between the 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a pinching portion in which the leaf spring member 20312b is recessed so as to be sandwiched at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4. It mainly includes a recess 20312a5.

The side surface of the recessed portion 20311c2 on the side far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is arranged parallel to the wall portion on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed, and the vertical distance between them is larger than the thickness of the leaf spring portion agent 20312b. Is also slightly enlarged.

The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the size of the entrance of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3, and is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2 in the assembled state and is recessed. The upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft rod portion 20312a1 fitted in the 20311c1 so that it cannot be pulled out, and the lower end portion (located at the upper end portion of the opening 20312a3) of the upper portion 20312b1 are bent and the opening 20312a3 is directed inward. The lower portion 20312b2 is extended and inserted into the sandwiching recess 20312a5, and the locking hole 20312b3 is formed in the upper portion 20312b1. In the present embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is urged in a direction in which the bending is gentle (a direction in which the lower end portion in FIG. 104A is rotationally rubbed counterclockwise).

The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole into which the locking convex portion 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2. Therefore, even if the leaf spring member 20312b is loaded outward (to the right in FIG. 104 (a)) in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the leaf spring member 20312b from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2. ..

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction in which it falls off, the leaf spring member 20312b also needs to be moved together, but the moving direction locks the locking hole 20312b3 of the leaf spring member 20312b. Since the direction is to bite into the portion 20311c3, the leaf spring member 20312b cannot be moved, and as a result, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a can be prevented from falling off from the recessed portion 20311c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed inside the back side frame member 20311, the plate is in the direction in which the urging force of the leaf spring member 20312b increases. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to remove the shaft rod portion 20312a1 from the recessed portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correction device 2031 during the game, even though the structure does not use any fastening members such as screws.

Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end portion of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end portion of the operating region hole 20311b. The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed on the outside of the back side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by the visual inspection.

As a method of assembling the posture correction device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring portion agent 20312b is not yet inserted into the narrow holding recess 20312a5.

Next, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b in a state where it can freely move inside the opening 20312a3 is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

Finally, the state shown in FIG. 104 (a) can be formed by pulling the lower portion 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b downward from the inside of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the narrow holding recess 20312a5. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated in the direction close to the locking convex portion 20311c3 with the side surface on which the recessed portion 20311c1 is recessed as a fulcrum as a fulcrum, and the locking hole 20311c3. The 20312b3 is hooked on the locking convex portion 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from falling off from the insertion recess 20311c2.

In this way, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, it can be easily assembled and removed (the lower side frame member 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is as in the assembled state. If the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of the 20311, it becomes difficult to remove it.

Therefore, when the back side frame member 20311 is removed and the posture correction device 20312 is removed from the inside as in the case of maintenance, the work can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture is corrected from the outside of the back side frame member 20311. Cheating such as removing device 20312 can be made difficult.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the 17th embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described, but in the operation device 21300 in the 21st embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. Consists of. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

106 (a) and 106 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 21300 in the 21st embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a). Note that FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. .. Further, in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 106 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. To.

As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 extending forward and upward (in the diagonally upper left direction in FIG. 106 (a)) and arranged inside a pair of friction arm portions 17362c.

The extended slide portion 21322b2 includes an elongated hole 21322b21 that is bored in the left-right direction (vertical direction on the paper surface of FIG. 106) and extends in the vertical direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is arranged at a position where the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106A, and is outside the arc passing through the position centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 from that position. Is extended downward so that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases, and the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

The swing member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to that of the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support rod 363, a cushioning member 364, a regulation rod 365, a vibrating device 366, and the like. (See FIG. 81).

The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a convex pin 21362d projecting inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

In the present embodiment, since the convex pin 21362d is inserted into the elongated hole 21322b21, the movement mode of the swinging operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 due to the rotation of the lever member 13340 is changed by setting the shape of the elongated hole 21322b21. be able to. For example, by making the elongated hole 21322b21 a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 with respect to the lever member 13340 of the swing operation member 13310 when the lever member 13340 rotates about the lever support shaft 331d1. Displacement can be eliminated.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the lever member 13340 is rotated to be convex. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated to fill the gap in the fitting position that occurs between the setting pin 21362d and the elongated hole 21322b21. Therefore, if the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates (in conjunction with) with the rotation operation of the lever member 13340 (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state of FIG. 106 (a) to the state of FIG. 106 (b)). , FIG. 106 (a) is rotated clockwise), so that the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. As a result, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

Next, the 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. In the 21st embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture by guiding the convex pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 to the groove portion 21322b21 has been described. However, the operation device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment has been described. The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the tooth rotation of the gear. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

107 (a) and 107 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment on the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa of FIG. 17 (a).

FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in an upward position, and FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in a downward position. In addition, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed is shown, and in FIG. 107 (a), the lever member 22340 is shown. On the other hand, the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the forward rotation side is shown, and in FIG. 107 (b), the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated to the backward rotation side with respect to the lever member 22340 is shown. To. Further, in FIGS. 107 (a) and 107 (b), the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 are omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 that is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 while pivotally supporting the swing operation member 13310 at one end (left side of FIG. 107 (b)). A wall member 22322b having an arc wall portion 22322b2 that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swing member 22360 having a tooth plywood portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotary gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Mainly prepare.

The lever member 22340 is configured by adding a rotary gear 22347 axially supported by the angle control rod member 346 to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

The wall member 22322b is a plate member fitted in the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and is an inward extending portion 22322b1 extending in a direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1 and an inward extending portion 22322b1 thereof. 22322b2 is an arc wall portion that extends from the inner end of 22322b1 (right side in FIG. 107 (a)) along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and has gear teeth that are meshed with the rotary gear 22347. And.

The swing member 22360 is a motor fixing plate having a tooth plywood portion 22362c in which the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360 according to the thirteenth embodiment is formed with gear teeth meshed with the rotary gear 22347. It is configured in a manner exchanged for 22362.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the rotation of the lever member 22340 causes the rotary gear 22347 to rotate with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is pivotally supported by the rotation of the rotary gear 22347. It is rotated around the rod 363. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 107 (b), and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees during that time. That is, the gear ratio of the tooth plywood portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be partially stretchable in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is shrunk so that the swing operation member 310 can be stored rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is arranged in a downward position and projects in front of the pachinko machine 10, and is a box for packing. The front-rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits in a packing box when it protrudes from the outside.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the gear damper 6347 causes viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gear damper may generate viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are suction-fixed. In this case, the resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operation feeling can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other). Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end of the lock receiving member 4350 come into contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be restricted from swinging at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position separated upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 swings due to the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, so that the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By making the swing operation member 310 reciprocate up and down, it is possible to perform a fanning operation.

Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it's okay.

In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and the fanning operation can be performed. Moreover, even if the player makes an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the fanning operation, the lock member 4336 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 can be used. It can be prevented from being damaged.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 to regulate the swing of the lever member 340, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is arranged from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inside of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is extended when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other. It may be inserted into the lower side of the rear end portion of the lever member 340.

In this case, since it is not necessary to make the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 into a shape that fits under the lever member 340, the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in an intermediate posture in the swing angle range has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the uppermost position of the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side.

In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted, so that the player can operate the lever member 340. As a result, the momentum in the swing direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that the momentum is applied). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from vigorously colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

Further, for example, the lock member 8336 may be arranged on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player notices that the swing operation member is heavy. There can be time to relieve the load on the 310.

On the other hand, when the rear end of the lever member 340 is arranged at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the release member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the release member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged in information from the intermediate position of the swing range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not abut on the release member 350). It may be arranged in.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed to have the same length and the elastic modulus of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is made larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92 has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic modulus, and the upper elastic connecting member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic connecting member CS92.

In this case, in a state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that the elastic recovery is performed. In the later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. This makes it easy for the player to push the lens member 317 from above.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the hook member 13312c is formed of a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a shape memory material that maintains the shape of the hook member 13312c at room temperature and changes its shape in such a manner that the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the hook member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the protective cover 13316 is formed of a hard resin and the back side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by deforming the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the back side frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a friction coefficient smaller than that of the first region may be formed on the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c first gives a feeling of operation (rotational resistance, weight) to the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extension portion 17322b1 are rubbing against each other. It can be changed depending on whether it rubs against the region or when the friction arm portion 17362c rubs against the second region.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is arranged in the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotary lever 19337b may come into contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving toward the downward position (the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be achieved by moving the rotary lever 19337b in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the lever member 19340 and bringing them into contact with each other.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<An example of a technical concept in which the lever member 340 breaks when locked>
In a gaming machine including a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player and a regulating member that regulates the movement of the moving member, the moving member is provided by the player. The operation member to be operated and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of restricting movement by the regulating member are provided, and the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the operating member.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player manually operates is restricted from moving at a predetermined position by a regulating member (for example,). (See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the player applies an overload to the moving member while the movement is restricted, the load is applied to the regulating member through the moving member, and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member operated by the player and a regulated member connected to the operating member so that the movement can be regulated by the regulating member, and is regulated. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed by applying a load of a predetermined amount or more to the operating member, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. As a result, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged by the player applying an overload to the moving member.

The structure of the moving member that realizes the deformation of the shape of the moving member due to the load is, for example, a structure in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, or a structure in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts. An example is a configuration in which each part is attracted by a magnetic force.

In a configuration in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged as a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the shape of the moving member changes in proportion to the applied load, so that the player applies an overload to the operating member. The greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, the more the player applies an overload to the operating member, the larger the load consumed by the elastic member can be, and the more the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced.

In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is attracted by a magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load equal to or greater than the attractive force is applied, and the moving member must be applied with a load greater than the attractive force. The shape of is deformed. As a result, when the moving member is operated as usual with a load equal to or less than the suction force, the moving member can be treated as a rigid body, and the moving member can be easily operated.

In the game machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more to the operating member in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, by being loaded with the load of the above, at least the operating member can be configured in a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state in which the operating member is fixed to the regulated member and in a state in which the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulated member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operating member can move relative to the regulated member. Therefore, the operating member can be operated in the fixed state. It is possible to suppress the transmission of the load to the regulating member in the non-transmission state while ensuring the property.

In the game machines A1 and 2, the support member for supporting the moving member is provided, and the operating member and the regulated member constituting the moving member are coaxially supported by a first axis arranged on the supporting member. The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the movement of the moving member is a swing about the first axis.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machines A1 and 2, it is possible to suppress a large load from being applied between the regulated member and the regulated member by operating the operating member, and the regulated member or the subject It is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

The game machine A4 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force for moving the moving member in the swing direction, and the urging force is applied to the operating member side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the urging force of the first urging member is applied to the operating member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the addition of urging force. This makes it possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged by receiving an excessive urging force from the first urging member when the moving member is in the non-transmission state.

Here, when an excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner of connecting the operating member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand or contract in the fixed state, but the operating member is not transmitted. An example is a case where the spring member between the regulated member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force. In this case, the amount of change in the distance between the operating member and the regulated member becomes large, so that an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulated member.

In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is generated in the direction of tilting the operating member forward, and the fixed state. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member while the moving member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

Here, if the urging direction of the first urging member is set to the direction in which the moving member rises, the operating member is separated from the regulated member and regulated when the player applies a downward overload to the operating member. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operating member rises as soon as the player releases the hand, so that the player may not notice that the operating member is overloaded and may repeatedly overload the operating member. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, in the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the direction of urging the operation member by the first urging member is directed to the direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, so that the operation member is moved downward. Can be kept in place. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player repeatedly applies an overload to the operating member.

In the game machine A4, the first axis is arranged in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction, the urging force of the first urging member is directed in the direction of raising the operating member, and the movement in the fixed state. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member in a state where the member is restricted from swinging by the regulating member.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A4, the operating member is directed in the direction of raising and a non-transmission state is formed by applying a downward load to the operating member, so that the player can operate the operating member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member to form a non-transmission state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the urging force. As a result, the arrangement of the operating members can be stabilized, and the player can easily perform the next operation.

In the game machine A6, the game machine A7 includes a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operating member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member returns to the fixed state at high speed. It is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

In the game machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating a viscous resistance, and is characterized in that the gear portion disposed on the operating member and the gear damper mesh with each other. Game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the braking means is composed of a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the higher the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. .. Therefore, the resistance when the swing speed is small (the return speed of the operation member is small) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state, the player operates the operation member and the operation member swings at high speed. The resistance can be increased.

As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller than in the case where a large resistance corresponding to the player's high-speed operation is generated regardless of the swing speed, and the design of the first urging member is free. The degree can be improved.

A9 of the game machine A8, wherein the gear damper is arranged in a manner of generating a viscous resistance with respect to the relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swing as one, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of the game machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operation member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operation member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operating member.

Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be made to act on the operating member only when the player applies a load to the operating member so that the regulated member and the operating member form a non-transmission state. As a result, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operating member and encourage the player to use the operating member appropriately.

For example, when the operating resistance when operating the operating member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to operate the operating member, which causes stress. When the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced and the player can easily operate the operating member.

Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress will avoid applying an overload to the operating member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the moving member from being destroyed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A9, a driving device for generating a driving force for driving the moving member and a transmitting member for transmitting the driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member receives a load and said. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is arranged at a position where the load is not transmitted when the state changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmission state, the load is not transmitted to the transmission member. , Damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

The position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member is the position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves when the moving member moves in the direction in which the load is received, or the position in which the moving member receives the load. In this case, a position in which the moving member moves and is separated from the moving member by a predetermined distance is exemplified.

In the game machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmission state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A game machine A11 characterized by the fact that.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect of the game machine A10, when the swing of the moving member is regulated by the regulating member, even if the driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging the regulated member and not for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulated member from being damaged.

In the game machines A2 to A11, the operating member is arranged in the second position as compared with the case where the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is arranged in the first position. The moving member is restricted from moving by the regulating member when the moving member is arranged at the second position, and the operating member and the regulated member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is characterized in that the fixed state is formed by the operation.

Here, since the width of the operating member overhanging outward is smaller when the swing of the operating member is regulated at the first position, for example, when selecting a box for packing the game machine, the operating member is regulated at the first position. The box can be made smaller by selecting it based on the fixed state.

On the other hand, if the power is turned off while the swing of the operating member is restricted at the second position, the operating member cannot be moved from the second position and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

In addition, if the line width is determined by the width of the operation member placed in the first position on the inspection line of a factory or the like, the operation member is mistakenly placed in the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operating member may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

According to the game machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A11, even if the movement is restricted at the second position where the moving member projects the operating member, the operating member and the regulated member are still in contact with each other. Since it is fixed by an electromagnet, it is possible to release the fixation between the operating member and the regulated member by turning off the power supply. As a result, the operating member can be easily arranged in the first position, the game machine can be stored in the packing box, and the inspection on the improved inspection line can be facilitated.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated from the driving device are used as the moving member. A game machine including a transmission member for transmitting to the above, wherein the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the moving member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is driven by a gear mesh (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -144218 (see). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is lowered, or the moving member is moved by the driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in the direction away from the transmitting member, so that a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmitting member. It can be suppressed. In addition, the drive can prevent the moving member from giving a load to the player. Examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

In the game machine B1, the game machine B2 is characterized in that the transmission member is eccentrically supported by a first axis and is composed of a member that is rotated about the first axis.

Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmitting member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmitting member collide with each other. As the moving width of the moving member increases, the arm length of the transmitting member often becomes longer. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged due to the collision.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, since the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam, when the moving member is driven in a portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is long. When colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmitting member collide from the first axis by taking a posture in which the portion where the distance from the first axis to the outer shape is short is directed toward the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be used. This makes it possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged.

The game machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction that brings the moving member and the transmission member close to each other. Game machine B3.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member. Therefore, the moving member is moved by rotating the transmission member around the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. This makes it easier for the player to draw the attention of the moving member.

In the game machine B3, the moving member is swingably supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by the player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is arranged on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft interposed therebetween and below the moving member.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the transmission member is under the moving member in a state where the second axis is extended in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the direction of tilting forward. Since it is arranged on the side and on the opposite side of the operating member with the second shaft in between, it is possible to suppress the application of a load to the transmitting member when the player pushes down the operating member. Thereby, the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

In the game machine B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the operation member is provided with an effect member for producing an effect on the player.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B4, since the operation member is provided with the effect member for producing the effect on the player, the operation member can attract the attention of the player.

Examples of the effect device for producing the effect on the player include a light emitting device such as an LED arranged on the substrate, a vibration device that generates vibration, and the like.

In the game machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibrating device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is directed in a direction that separates the moving member from the transmitting member. A game machine B6 characterized by this.

Here, when the effect device is arranged on the operating member, the weight of the moving member on the operating member side becomes heavy, so that a large urging force of the first urging member is required. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may increase.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the effect member is provided with a vibrating device that generates at least vibration, and the load applied to the operating member due to the vibration of the vibrating device is a moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, so that the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member can be reduced by the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine B6, the operating member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, the vibrating device is arranged at a substantially central portion of the operating member, and the vibrating portion vibrated by the vibrating device is outside the operating member. A game machine B7 characterized in that it is connected to a shell as a rigid body.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the operation member is formed in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is arranged in the substantially central portion of the operation member. It is possible to secure the size of the vibrating device while keeping it small. On top of that, the vibrating part vibrated by the vibrating device is not hidden inside the operating member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operating member as a rigid body, so that the vibration is directly applied to the fingers of the player who operates the operating member. I can tell. Therefore, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved.

In any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member includes a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is the first axis with the second axis interposed therebetween. A game machine B8 characterized in that it is arranged on the opposite side.

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B3 to B7, the operating member is provided with a pushing member that enables a downward pushing operation, and the direction axis for pushing the pushing member is a second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first axis with the shaft in between, when the player pushes the pushing member, the moving member receives a load in the direction away from the transmitting member, and the load applied to the transmitting member from the moving member. Can be reduced.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed so as not to be displaced and cannot be pushed are configured.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, a pushable state in which the push member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the push member is fixed in a non-displaceable manner and cannot be pushed are configured. The effect on the moving member can be switched on the gaming machine side by the operation performed by the person.

For example, when a player repeatedly pushes (continuously hits) the pushing member intermittently, when the pushing member returns from the pushed state, the moving member receives a load in a direction close to the transmission member due to the reaction. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, when the pushing-in impossible state is set, the entire operating member is pushed down in response to the pushing operation of the player, so that the moving member also moves in the direction away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player repeatedly hits the pushing member, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the transmitting member and the moving member collide with each other due to the operating member returning upward by the urging force.

In addition, as a method of configuring the push-in impossible state, a method of locking the push member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor that makes a linear reciprocating motion is used to extend the push member to the terminal position. An example is a method (continuing to apply a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the pushing member to the terminal position by a vibrating device such as a voice coil motor, the vibrating device causes both the action of vibrating the pushing member and the action of making the pushing member in a push-in impossible state. Can be made to.

In any of the game machines B4 to B9, the first axis and the second axis are arranged in parallel, and the side in which the rotation direction of the transmission member is separated from the first axis across the second axis is said. A game machine B10 characterized in that the direction is opposed to a moving member.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is a direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis with the second axis in between. Therefore, when the transmission member moves facing the moving member, the load applied to the transmission member from the moving member is suppressed (the distance from the second axis to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and is pivotally supported and eccentrically supported by the rotating gear to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving device and the movement. An eccentric cam that comes into contact with a member is provided, and a fixed state in which the rotary gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotary gear can move relative to the eccentric cam are configured. A game machine B11 characterized in that it is possible.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam is equal to or higher than the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam can be released from the moving member by setting the eccentric cam and the rotary gear in a non-transmissive state. This makes it possible to prevent the eccentric cam from being damaged.

The case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear can be configured in a non-transmission state is, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotary gear are in the circumferential direction. An example is the case where the gears are fitted by friction.

<Example of technical concept in which the lock member that fixes the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and an eccentric support on the first axis. A gaming machine including a transmission member that transmits the driving force of the drive device to the moving member and a regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member, wherein the regulating member causes the moving member to swing. A regulateable standby state and a release state for releasing the restriction on the swing of the moving member can be configured, and the transmission member and the regulating member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A game machine C1 characterized by.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is oscillated by an eccentric cam-shaped transmitting member driven by a driving device. In response to the urging force that moves the moving member in the direction close to the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, the swing of the moving member is regulated during the swing of the moving member, and the swing of the moving member is regulated at a predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a restricting member to be released (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-244108). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the minor axis side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side that comes into contact with the moving member in accordance with the release of the restriction on the swing of the moving member. It is possible to prevent damage to the transmission member when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, but if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed and the eccentricity is eccentric. There is a problem that the cam-shaped transmission member may collide with the moving member on the major axis side and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the regulating member that regulates the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. The posture of the transmission member when is in the released state can be mechanically determined. As a result, the moving member and the transmitting member can be brought into contact with each other with the high-strength side (minor diameter side) of the transmitting member facing the moving member, so that the durability of the transmitting member can be improved.

In the game machine C1, the restricting member is synchronously operated with the transmission member only in the phase in which the regulation of the swing of the moving member is released, and when the synchronous operation with the transmission member is released, the regulation is performed. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is put into the standby state, and the swing of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, after the regulating member releases the restriction on the swing of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be exclusively used for swinging the moving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the regulation member moving together when the transmission member is rotated.

Further, even when the player operates the moving member during the synchronous drive, the swing of the moving member can be regulated by the regulating member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (release of the swing regulation of the moving member) can be performed.

In the game machine C2, when the regulating member is put into the standby state, the swing of the moving member is restricted by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member. The moving member is capable of performing a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on the movement mode of the transmission member. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a recessed portion that is recessed from the swing locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when the first operation is executed.

When the swing direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member so that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a preliminary step of restricting the swinging direction of the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to regulate the swing direction, such as the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C2, when the moving member executes the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is recessed. It is possible to prevent the resistance from being applied to the moving member. As a result, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. It is composed of an eccentric cam, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a tangential force, the inside of the cam portion of the transmitting member The first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member, is configured to be in contact with a cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmitting member pivotally supported by the first axis, and the moving member is formed by the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when it starts to come into contact with the moving member.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released and the moving member moves toward the transmission member by a tangential force. In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface on the side that comes into contact with the moving member of the transmission member, is configured to be in contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member pivotally supported by the first axis. Since the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the swing displacement of the moving member can be secured to the maximum. Therefore, it is possible to configure a synchronous state in which the maximum swing displacement of the moving member is secured immediately after the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released.

In the game machine C4, the game machine C5 is characterized in that an end portion of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmission member from the beginning of contact.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

Here, when the moving member hits the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotation direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam becomes large, and the load applied to the drive device in the rotation direction becomes large. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not hit the moving member in the rotational direction of the transmitting member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member and the transmitting member hit each other, it is better to swing the moving member at the large outer diameter portion because the swinging speed of the moving member can be increased, so that the effect is improved. be able to.

In the case of synchronous drive, the timing at which the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically adjusted. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface can be slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made to.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, a first urging device for generating an urging force for swinging the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member is provided, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A game machine C6 characterized by being rocked.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the transmission member includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. It is composed of an eccentric cam that rotates around the first axis, and when the regulation of the swing of the moving member by the regulating member is released, the transmitting member comes into contact with the moving member and moves following the rotation of the transmitting member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing when the restriction on the swing of the moving member is released. This makes it easier for the player to concentrate on the game.

<Example of technical concept in which the operation unit placed at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
The vibration of the vibration device is provided with a moving member that moves between the first position and the second position by being operated by the player, and a vibration device that is arranged on the moving member and is capable of generating vibration. D1 is a gaming machine D1 characterized in that the direction of the moving member and the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined to each other.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by being operated by a player is provided with a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-120741). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent problems such as the game machine from shaking due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the game machine. there were.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibrating device arranged on the moving member are inclined, so that the vibration generated by the vibrating device is generated by the longitudinal direction of the moving member. It can be decomposed into a directional component along the direction and a directional component along the vertical direction of the directional component, and vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

Examples of the vibrating device include a voice coil motor that constitutes vibration in the linear direction, a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight, and the like. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

The game machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that causes the moving member to swing, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member, and the vibrating device is in a linear direction. The gaming machine D2 is composed of a device that generates vibration, and the transmission member is arranged on the side opposite to the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibrating device.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the reaction generated when the vibrating device operates is directed in the direction of separating the moving member from the transmitting member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibrating device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member from receiving a load due to the vibration of the vibrating device.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction, and the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member to generate vibration of the vibrating device. The gaming machine D3 is characterized in that a central axis is arranged so as to pass through the second axis, and a cushioning member that absorbs vibration is arranged on the second axis.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second axis arranged on the moving member, and the vibration device is composed of a device that generates vibration in the linear direction. Since the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through the second axis and the cushioning member is arranged on the second axis, the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the cushioning member. As a result, the vibration transmitted to the moving member can be suppressed, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be suppressed.

The game machine D3 is characterized in that the moving member includes a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second shaft is increased by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the moving member is provided with a pushing member that the player pushes in, and the rotation resistance of the second axis is increased by pushing the pushing member. Since it is configured, it is possible to suppress the rotational operation of the vibrating device and secure a large vibration component, particularly when the player pushes the pushing member. As a result, the state in which the vibrating device can easily rotate on the second axis and the state in which the vibrating device secures a large vibration component can be switched by the operation of the player.

In the game machine D4, the game machine D5 is characterized in that the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, the vibrating device is connected to the pushing member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibrating device through the pushing member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed, the vibrating device vibrates and swings around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device, while when pushing the pushing member, the vibrating device swings. It is possible to increase the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player by suppressing the vibration. Therefore, the behavior of the vibrating device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

In the game machine D1 or D2, the vibrating device is pivotally supported by a second axis arranged on the moving member, and the central axis of vibration of the vibrating device is arranged so as to pass through a position separated from the second axis. A game machine D6 characterized by being played.

When the connection between the moving member and the vibrating device is used as a shaft support, the vibration transmitted to the player side can be increased by matching the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device with the shaft support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the game machine. Therefore, there is a problem that loosening of the fastening screw and deterioration of the member occur at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1 or D2, the rotating axis of the vibrating device and the central axis of the vibration of the vibrating device are shifted to rotate the vibrating device. The vibration of the device can be utilized, and the vibration transmitted to the game machine can be reduced (the energy of the vibration is used for the rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the effect of the vibrating device can be improved by vibrating the vibrating device.

The game machine D6 includes a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is arranged on an operation member held by the player.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of the game machine D6, a vibration device is provided on the operating member gripped by the player, and the vibration device is provided with a detection device for detecting the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member during the operation, vibration can be suppressed and the signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. This makes it possible to detect whether the player is holding the operating member (whether it is in the preparatory stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of moving members that perform fanning>
The gaming machine E1 is provided with an input device for the player to perform an input operation, and the input device is driven in a direction in which the player is moved away from the player and is provided with an input unit which is a portion for performing an input operation.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the timing for operating the input device is specified (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-210238). However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that it is not possible to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in the direction of approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in the direction of approaching the player, and the player's fingers By operating the input unit in a manner of pushing back the input unit, the timing of operation of the input unit can be determined on the game machine side.

Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling a moving member.

In the game machine E1, the input device includes a vibrating device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in such a manner that the vibrating direction of the vibrating device and the direction of operating the input unit coincide with each other. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is inoperable when pressed against the unit, and the input unit is operable when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the input unit is disabled when the vibrating device is pressed against the input unit, and the input unit is retracted from the input unit when the vibrating device is retracted from the input unit. Since the unit can be operated, the vibrating device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

In the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is made smaller than the elastic modulus of the second urging device that exerts a reaction force on the device side.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2, the elastic modulus of the first urging device is smaller than that of the second urging device, so that the vibrating device is separated from the input device. The input unit can be operated with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning to the desired position. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of the vibration that the player passively feels.

In the game machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm. A game machine E4 characterized by this.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E2 or E3, an input device provided with an input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, the input device is formed. Since the input unit can be arranged at the position of the palm, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, by further grasping the input device while grasping it, the palm can be pressed against the input unit, and another operation such as changing the input device can be unnecessary.

Further, since the input unit can be hidden by the palm, the operation of the input unit vibrating can be grasped only by the player holding the input unit. As a result, it is possible to announce a big hit or the like in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

The game machine E5 is characterized in that the game machine E4 is provided with a locking portion for locking the fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input part side is received by the palm, and the vibration by the vibration device is generated by hooking the finger on the locking part. Can be confined inside the palm. As a result, it is possible to secure a large amount of vibration felt by the player.

<An example of the technical idea that the spherical part turns to the player side at the lower end of the movement>
It is provided with an operation member having an operation unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operation member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable, and by moving the connecting member. When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can form a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. The gaming machine F1 is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction.

A gaming machine is known that includes an operating member having an operating portion such as a push button, and the posture of the operating member with respect to the player changes between the first state and the second state when the operating member moves (for example, special feature). Open 2014-144218 (see). In such a game machine, for example, if the posture is set so that the player can easily operate it in the first state, it may be difficult to operate in the second state, and the operation feeling of the operating member is felt in the first state and the second state. There is a problem that the player feels stress due to the change and the player may be dissatisfied.

For example, when the operating member is arranged at a distance from the front side of the player and the operating unit requires a pushing-down operation, even if the operating unit can be easily operated, the operating member is extended in the left-right direction. When the player approaches the player by moving in an arc orbit centered on the player and the operation unit changes to a mode in which a pushing operation from the front side is required, the space for arranging the arm for pushing the operation unit becomes narrow, and the game It becomes difficult for a person to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon the operation of the operation unit.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating member by moving the connecting member can form a first state and a second state different from the first state. In this case, since the correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in the direction of reducing the amount of change is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to change the operating feeling of the operating member. Therefore, by being configured to be easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state that is easy for the player to operate even in the second state.

The correction means is composed of, for example, a wall member and a contact member arranged on the operation member in a manner capable of contacting the wall member, and occurs when the contact member comes into contact with the wall member. A device that changes the posture of the operating member by a reaction force, a device that meshes with the gear teeth arranged on the operating member, and a group of gears that apply a load in the rotational direction to the gear teeth by moving the connecting member, etc. Is exemplified.

Moreover, as a mode of movement of the connecting member, rotation about a predetermined rotation axis, slide movement in a linear direction, and the like are exemplified.

The game machine F1 is provided with a drive device for driving the connecting member, and the operating member is in a changing state in which the posture of the operating member changes within the moving range of the connecting member, and the operating member is not changed in posture and the operating member and the connecting member are not changed. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated from the correction means on the operation member in the change state is directed to brake the connection member.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connecting member, so that the connecting member is driven as compared with the case where the connecting member constantly changes its posture. The driving force required for braking can be suppressed, and the load generated on the operating member from the correction means in the changing state is directed in the direction of braking the connecting member, so that the driving device can brake the connecting member. The correction means can assist the force that needs to be generated, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range to form a changing state, the correction means gives the operating member at the lower end of the moving range. The moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member can be reduced by the load, and the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member is suppressed from increasing when the connecting member and the operating member rise to the vicinity of the upper end of the moving range. , The driving force required to drive the connecting member can be suppressed.

The game machine F2 includes a contacted member that comes into contact with the correcting means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the correcting means comes into contact with the contacted member when the operating member moves. The featured game machine F3.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the operation member changes its posture due to the contact between the correction means and the contacted member, so that the driving force of the driving device can be transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connecting member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is arranged on the connecting member, and the posture of the operating member is changed until the correction means reaches the position where the contacted member is arranged. By maintaining the above, it is possible to indicate the timing at which the player operates the operation unit.

In the game machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the changed state, the operating member is subjected to the operation member by applying a load in a predetermined direction opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correction means to the operating member. The gaming machine F4, wherein the correction means is configured so that the posture can be changed in a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2 or F3, when the posture changes in the changing state, the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force face each other in the direction facing the direction of the posture change. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction in which the load may become excessive, the correcting means is configured to be able to change the posture of the operating member in the predetermined direction, thereby suppressing the destruction of the correcting means. can do.

In the game machine F4, the correction means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member and the game machine F5, wherein the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the correction means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided between the correction means and the operation member, so that the repulsive force proportional to the posture change of the operation member is deformed. Is possible, and when a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operating member, the moving amount of the operating member is increased by increasing the force applied to the operating member from the correction means as the moving amount of the operating member increases. Can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the abutting member provided with the abutting means, the connecting member is a lever member pivotally supported by the amusement machine main body, and the abutting means abuts the abutting member. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the direction of the reaction force received when it comes into contact with the member is a direction having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F5, the correction means abuts on the contacted member in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member, and thus is operated by the correction means. Since the load applied to the member acts along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives the load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to suppress the lever member from vibrating in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (It is possible to suppress the load applied to the operating member by the correction means from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member when the operating member comes into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture can be stabilized, and the operability can be improved.

The game machine F6 is characterized in that the contacted member projects so as to be in contact with the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correction means.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the contacted member through the correction means by the operation of the player or the like, the contacted member is used as the lever member. The lever member can be braked by projecting to the abutting position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member, but when the load applied to the operating member from the correction means is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member Movement resistance can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to achieve both prevention of breakage of the lever member and lightening of the operation of the lever member.

<An example of a technical idea that can switch whether or not the spherical part turns at the lower end of the movement>
An operating member having an operating unit operated by the player, a connecting member for connecting the operating member to the game machine main body in a manner movable by a predetermined width, and at least a driving device for driving the connecting member are provided and connected. In a gaming machine in which the operating member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture with the member arranged at a predetermined position, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The first operating state in which the transmission member is provided and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is maintained in the first posture, and the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position. The driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member, and the operating member is configured to be switchable between a second operating state in which the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the movement width of the operating member is invariant between the first operating state and the second operating state.

There is known a game machine that includes an operating member and a connecting member and drives the operating member relative to the connecting member by a driving device that drives the connecting member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, even if there are scenes where operability is emphasized and scenes where the effect is emphasized, since there is only one type of movement of the operating member with respect to the movement of the connecting member, is it important to emphasize operability? There was room for improvement because it was necessary to choose one that emphasizes the effect and sacrifice the other.

For example, when a push button operated by a player is provided on an operation member, it is easier for the player to push the push button when the posture of the push button as seen from the player is constant, while the operation member is arranged. Since the movement of itself becomes small, it becomes difficult to perform a large effect by utilizing the movement of the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, in the first operating state in which the operating member is maintained in the first posture when the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position, and in the state where the connecting member is arranged in the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member via the transmitting member and the operating member is changed from the first posture to the second posture, the second operating state can be switched while keeping the movement width of the operating member unchanged. , It is possible to achieve both operability and directing effect.

For example, when a push button is arranged on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is pushed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, at the time of the production that does not require the player to operate, by keeping the posture of the operating member in the first posture, the operability can be switched to the disregarded production, and the operating member can be greatly operated. .. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in operability and improvement in color rendering.

Further, since the movement width of the operating member is unchanged between the first operating state and the second operating state, the player is in which operating state the operating member is in until the posture of the operating member changes at a predetermined position. Since it is difficult to grasp whether or not the player is playing, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the first operating state is set until the player is made to operate the operation unit, the operating member is continuously reciprocated with a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operating state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operating member. , The player can be informed of the timing to press the operation unit, and the operation member itself is placed in an easy-to-push posture to make the game easy to understand (the timing to press the push button is easy to understand) and comfortable (push button). Can be made easier to press).

The game machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits a driving force to the transmission member, the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connecting member, and the eccentric cam member is the said. The gaming machine G2 is configured to transmit the driving force of the driving device to either the transmitting member or the connecting member, and includes a switching means capable of switching which of the transmitting members is transmitted.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is switchably transmitted to either the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member, so that the operating member and the connecting member It is possible to suppress the driving force generated from the driving device as compared with the case where the two are driven at the same time.

As a mode for switching whether to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member or the operating member, a gear group in which the driving device and the connecting member are connected by teeth from the driving device is arranged, depending on the situation. The eccentric cam member is configured so that the gears to be meshed can be switched, and the eccentric cam member can come into contact with either the connecting member or the transmitting member during rotation, and the distance between the connecting member and the operating member is the eccentric cam. An embodiment in which the width is made larger than the width of the member is exemplified.

In the game machine G2, when the eccentric cam member comes into contact with the transmission member in a state of being rotated forward, a driving force is transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the driving force is not transmitted to the operating member when it comes into contact with the transmitting member in such a state.

Here, for example, when the eccentric cam member and the connecting member are separated from each other and the driving force is transmitted to the operating member, vibration during operation or the player operating the operating member. For example, it is necessary to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and stop the driving device in order to prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. It is necessary to add, and the control of the drive device becomes complicated.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operating member depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, so that the connecting member and the eccentricity can be switched. Even if the cam member is separated in the middle of operation, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched as long as the eccentric cam member is continuously rotated in a certain direction, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operating member. The control of the drive device can be relaxed (it is not necessary to stop the drive device immediately).

Further, since the detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be eliminated, the product cost can be reduced.

In the game machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first convex portion projecting along the rotation axis on the outer diameter portion, and the transmission member is in a manner capable of contacting the first convex portion. A second convex portion to be convex is provided, and the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the second convex portion is configured to be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, the second convex portion has a region that moves close to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. Since the second convex portion can be arranged closer to the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member than the first convex portion, the position of the second convex portion can be returned to the first convex portion and the eccentric cam member. This can be done by passing the second convex portion between the rotating shafts of the above.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the second convex portion moves to the outside of the locus of the outer diameter portion of the first convex portion of the eccentric cam member and then the posture of the transmission member is restored, the first convex portion is the first. The rotation angle of the transmission member from the contact with the convex portion to the separation from the convex portion can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

In the game machine G4, the first convex portion is configured as a wall portion inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting the outermost diameter portion of the first convex portion and the rotation axis of the eccentric cam member. In a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation, the pushing wall surface that comes into contact with the second convex portion is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction. The featured game machine G5.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of the game machine G4, when the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member, which is a state in which the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, is forward rotation, the transmission member and the contact member. Since the pushing wall surface in contact is inclined so as to be closer to the predetermined straight line in the axial direction, the eccentric cam member is formed as compared with the case where the pushing member is formed of the wall surface along the predetermined direction. It is possible to reduce the amount of movement of the transmission member when it is rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the transmission efficiency of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member per predetermined time, so that a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member via the transmission member in a short period of time by operating the operation member. It is possible to suppress being loaded.

In any of the game machines G3 to G5, a lock member for fixing the posture of the connecting member at a predetermined position is provided, and the unlocking of the posture of the connecting member by the locking member causes the eccentric cam member to rotate in the reverse direction. On the other hand, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that when the eccentric cam member rotates in the forward direction, the posture of the connecting member is maintained by the locking member.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G3 to G5, the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction, so that the connecting member is placed in a predetermined position. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (forward rotation direction) in the state of being arranged in, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operating member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connecting member. .. Therefore, even if the phase of the eccentric cam member is not finely controlled, the posture of the connecting member can be maintained by the lock member and the posture of the operating member can be changed, so that the control of the drive device can be relaxed. it can.

<Example of technical concept in which the restraining member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force pushing out the second moving member>
A first moving member configured to be movable, and a first movable member that is arranged in a state in which at least a part of the first moving member is projected outward and is movable with respect to the first moving member. Two moving members, an elastic member arranged on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member, one end of which is connected to the second moving member, and elastic member having spring elasticity. An inhibitory member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and is pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member to prevent the second moving member from separating from the first moving member. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the force of pressing the restraining member against the first moving member is increased by moving the portion of the second moving member that projects from the first moving member.

A gaming machine including a first moving member and a second moving member that projects outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a game machine, when the first moving member is moved, the second moving member may be damaged due to a collision with another member and need to be replaced. Therefore, it is better to temporarily fix the first moving member. On the other hand, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may come off from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated at the time of collision with other members.

In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with screws can increase the fixing force as compared with the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time to screw in the screws when assembling, and it takes time to remove the screws when removing them for maintenance or the like, which increases the work time.

That is, firmly fixing the second moving member to the first moving member, assembling the second moving member to the first moving member, and shortening the work time for removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There was a problem that it was difficult to achieve both.

On the other hand, in the game machine H1, the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in a direction that opposes the elastic force of the elastic member, so that the force that the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the restraining member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Therefore, while the replacement time is shortened by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by elastic force, the second moving member moves first when the second moving member comes into contact with another member. It is possible to prevent it from coming off the member.

The game machine H1 includes a hook member that holds the restraining member to the first moving member in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member so that the restraining member can not move. The gaming machine H2 is arranged at a part of a movable position in a direction of being pressed against the first moving member.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member, so that the hook member is first placed. Before attaching to the moving member, the space for attaching the hook member becomes an empty space, so that it becomes easy to arrange the suppressing member, and after the hook member is attached, the suppressing member is changed from the first moving member to the elastic member. It is possible to prevent the elastic force from separating in the vertical direction.

Further, since the hook member is arranged at a part of the movable position in the direction of being pressed against the first moving member of the restraining member, a force for holding the hook member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, the hook member can be easily removed from the first moving member by deforming the elastic member in the opposite direction, and the second moving member can be easily removed from the first moving member accordingly.

In the game machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are arranged inside the first moving member, and the hook member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, it is possible to prevent the player from illegally removing the elastic member and the restraining member, and the hook member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member, so that the hook member can be attached. The hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member when it comes off or is forgotten to be assembled, and the maintenance time can be shortened.

Further, since the hook member is attached from the outside, when the hook member is removed from the first moving member, the hook member can be dropped to the outside of the first moving member, and the hook member can be dropped. You can rely on it to determine the need for maintenance. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

Further, when the hook member is attached from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be further contracted by the size of the locking projection for locking the hook member from the first moving member so that it cannot be pulled out. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged outside the first moving member, and the amount of contraction of the elastic member when assembling the hook member is increased. It can be suppressed. As a result, the hook member can be attached while maintaining a large elastic force of the elastic member and maintaining a large strength of holding the second moving member and the restraining member in the first moving member (while using a hard elastic member). It can be easy.

The game machine H3 is characterized in that the hook member can be removed from the first moving member by displacing the restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction of being pressed by the elastic force.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, the hook member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by the elastic force, so that the hook member is first. Since it is removable from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the hook member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hook member from being removed illegally.

In any of the game machines H2 to H4, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced by invading the restraining member at the position where the hook member is arranged. H5.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effects of the game machines H2 to H4, a space in which the hook member is arranged is vacant due to a break of the hook member, and the restraining member invades the space to obtain a second. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the cushioning action against the load applied to the second moving member after the space where the hook member has been arranged is vacated due to breakage of the hook member or the like. , It is possible to prevent the second moving member from being damaged.

As the configuration of the hook member, for example, one that can be reassembled after the hook member is broken is exemplified. In this case, a part of the hook member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while the hook member is broken, so that it is easy to confirm from the appearance that the hook member is broken.

In any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member has a pulling state in which it can be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member and a locked state in which it cannot be pulled out from the outside of the first moving member. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is possible to form.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can form a pulled-out state and a locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. In some cases, it is possible to switch between a state in which the fraud prevention performance can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

In the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by the restraining member invading the inside of the space in which the hook member is arranged while the holding member is held by the hook member. The game machine H7.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, the pulled-out state can be formed by invading the restraining member into the vacant space when the hook member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is arranged at a regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent removal of the second moving member.

Further, when a large load is applied to the hook member and the hook member deviates from the normal position, a pulled-out state can be formed and the second moving member can be easily replaced, so that maintenance performance is improved. Can be made to.

<Example of technical concept to change the rotational resistance of the spherical part to the connecting member>
An operating member configured to be operable by a player and a connecting member that movably supports the operating member are provided, and a movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction is provided to the connecting member. A game machine I1 characterized by comprising variable means for making it variable.

A gaming machine including a connecting member and an operating member configured to be movable with respect to the connecting member is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a game machine, when the operating member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, the operating feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player) does not change, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member. There was a problem.

For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connecting member and the rotation resistance is changed between the case where the operation member is rotated forward and the case where the operation member is rotated in the reverse direction, the player can control the operation member. Since the relationship between the operating direction and the rotational resistance is always constant, there is little awareness (discovery) that occurs in the player due to the operation of rotating the operating member, and the player gets tired of operating the operating member.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the variable means for changing the movement resistance when the operating member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member is provided, the operation when the operating member is operated in the same direction is provided. It is possible to change the operation feeling of the member, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player who operates the operation member.

In addition, as the mode of the variable means, when the connecting member is configured to be movable, the mode of adjusting by the position of the connecting member, the mode of adjusting by the displacement amount of the operating member, and the mode other than the operating member and the connecting member An embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member (for example, a member for driving a connecting member) is exemplified.

For example, according to an embodiment in which adjustment is performed by a member other than the operating member and the connecting member, the state (state of movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member) can be known only by touching the operating member, and the player can understand the state. It is possible to raise the attention to the operating members of.

Further, when the connecting member is configured to be movable with respect to the game machine main body, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be switched between strength and weakness with the movement resistance of the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body as a boundary. While requesting the player to operate only the operating member, in some cases, it is easier to move the operating member with respect to the connecting member than to move the connecting member with respect to the game machine main body, and the operating member with respect to the connecting member. It is possible to switch between situations where it is easier to move the connecting member to the game machine body than to move it (difference from pressing the push button).

The game machine I1 is characterized in that the connecting member is configured to be movable, and the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the arrangement of the connecting member.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the strength of the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or the operating member is operated is adjusted. The movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed regardless of the connection member.

In addition, as a mode of adjusting the movement resistance by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, a mode of changing the movement resistance according to the movement amount of the connecting member or a movement resistance triggered by the arrangement of the connecting member at a predetermined position. An embodiment of switching between the above is exemplified.

The game machine I2 includes an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operating member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connecting member, and a wall member that is arranged so as to come into contact with the operating member. In a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member is given a load from the wall member in the first direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, and the operating member receives the load in the first direction. A game machine I3 characterized in that the operating member is configured to be moved.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, when the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, the operating member comes into contact with the wall member and the operating member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operating member that stands still is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is arranged at a position other than a predetermined position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

The game machine I2 is characterized by including a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operating member and rubs against the operating member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the operating member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connecting member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the operating member moves according to the area of rubbing from the beginning of rotation. The dynamic friction can be applied to the operating member, and the movement resistance can be sufficiently changed.

Examples of the arrangement position of the friction member include a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the connecting member and a mode in which the friction member is arranged in the main body case that supports the connecting member.

The game machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connecting member inside the box and a cover member that is arranged outside the main body case, and the friction member extends from the cover member to the connecting member side. A game machine I5 characterized in that it is configured as a part to be installed.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of the game machine I4, it is possible to facilitate the replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn, as compared with the case where the friction member is arranged on the connecting member. ..

In the game machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operating member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction as compared with the low friction portion. The gaming machine I6, characterized in that it is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operating member.

According to the game machine I6, the movement resistance of the operating member with respect to the connecting member can be changed depending on whether the operating member receives the dynamic friction mainly from the low friction portion or the dynamic friction mainly from the high friction portion. Therefore, the feeling of operation can be switched between two stages.

In the game machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member constituting the position of the center of gravity, and the adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A game machine I7 characterized by being struck.

According to the game machine I7, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance from the rotation axis of the operation member to the weight member, so that the movement of the operation member is performed. The load applied to the operating member can be reduced as compared with the case where the moving resistance of the operating member is increased by applying the load in the direction opposite to the direction.

Further, since the rotational resistance in the rotational direction for lifting the weight member can be improved when viewed from the rotation axis of the operating member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation axis can be reversed by moving the weight member. , The direction in which the rotational resistance becomes heavy can be reversed. Therefore, the feeling of operation given to the player can be changed.

In addition, as a mode of moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to the change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. An embodiment in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

In the game machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device that is configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connecting member, and a resistance changing member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operating member by displacement. I8, wherein the resistance changing member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

According to the game machine I8, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the movement resistance of the operating member is adjusted by displacement the resistance changing member by the driving force of the driving device that drives the connecting member, so that additional driving is performed. Without the device, the moving resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member at all.

Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operating member can be confirmed only when the player touches it, and the value for the player of touching the operating member can be increased. In addition, when the movement resistance of the operating member is changed when the operating member is in an advantageous state, it can be notified that the operating member is in an advantageous state in a form known only to the operating player. ..

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a slot machine. A game machine J1 characterized by this. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. A game machine J2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, and I1 to I8, the game machine is a pachinko machine. A game machine J3 characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating member that moves between a first position and a second position by a manual operation by a player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). Gazette).
However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operating member.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having good operability of operating members.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 has an operation member operated by the player and is configured to be movable, and the operation member and the game machine main body are connected and movable. The first state and the second state in which the posture of the operation member as seen by the player who operates the operation unit is different from the first state due to the movement of the connection member. When it is possible to form the operating member, a correction means for changing the posture of the operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in the posture is provided.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 includes a driving device for driving the connecting member in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, and the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture within the moving range of the connecting member and the above-mentioned A maintenance state is formed in which the posture of the operation member is not changed and the posture of the operation member and the connection member is maintained, and the load generated from the correction means on the operation member during the change state causes the connection member. Turn to the direction to brake.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 includes the contacted member that is brought into contact with the modifying means in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, and the modifying means is brought into contact with the modifying member when the operating member is moved. The posture of the operating member changes due to the contact.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the operability of the operating member can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the operability at the time of driving operation can be improved.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the weight of the operating member can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d 2nd sensor member (detector)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input part, pushing member, operation part)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 lever support shaft (1st shaft, 2nd shaft)
331d2 Eccentric camshaft (1st axis)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (regulatory member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (2nd shaft)
364 Cushioning member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Main body member (rotary gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall part (concave part)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Support member 13312c Hook member (lock member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contact member)
14333c2 Convex part (first convex part)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Main body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension (part of transmission member)
14337b1 Convex part (second convex part)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 Extension (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
CS1 vibration coil spring (second urging device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (1st urging device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of resistance changing member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first urging member, urging member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

Claims (3)

It is provided with an operating member having an operating unit operated by the player and being movable, and a connecting member that connects the operating member and the game machine main body and is configured to be movable.
When the posture of the operating member as seen by the player who operates the operating unit can be formed into a first state and a second state different from the first state by the movement of the connecting member, the posture. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a correction means for changing the posture of an operating member in a direction of reducing the amount of change in. A drive device for driving the connecting member is provided, and within the moving range of the connecting member, the changing state in which the operating member changes its posture and the posture of the operating member not changing and the posture of the operating member and the connecting member are maintained. The maintenance state is formed and
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the load generated from the correction means on the operating member in the changed state faces the direction in which the connecting member is braked. The claim is characterized in that the contacted member is provided in contact with the modifying means, and the posture of the operating member changes when the modifying means abuts on the contacted member when the operating member moves. 2. The game machine described.

Images